Mercurial > vim
annotate src/gui_gtk_x11.c @ 3070:880b7dd69331 v7.3.307
updated for version 7.3.307
Problem: Python 3 doesn't support slice assignment.
Solution: Implement slices. (Brett Overesch, Roland Puntaier)
| author | Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org> |
|---|---|
| date | Wed, 14 Sep 2011 15:01:58 +0200 |
| parents | 342b17608967 |
| children | 72528c5eb87e |
| rev | line source |
|---|---|
| 7 | 1 /* vi:set ts=8 sts=4 sw=4: |
| 2 * | |
| 3 * VIM - Vi IMproved by Bram Moolenaar | |
| 4 * | |
| 5 * Do ":help uganda" in Vim to read copying and usage conditions. | |
| 6 * Do ":help credits" in Vim to see a list of people who contributed. | |
| 7 * See README.txt for an overview of the Vim source code. | |
| 8 */ | |
| 9 | |
| 10 /* | |
| 11 * Porting to GTK+ was done by: | |
| 12 * | |
| 70 | 13 * (C) 1998,1999,2000 by Marcin Dalecki <martin@dalecki.de> |
| 7 | 14 * |
| 15 * With GREAT support and continuous encouragements by Andy Kahn and of | |
| 16 * course Bram Moolenaar! | |
| 17 * | |
| 18 * Support for GTK+ 2 was added by: | |
| 19 * | |
| 20 * (C) 2002,2003 Jason Hildebrand <jason@peaceworks.ca> | |
| 21 * Daniel Elstner <daniel.elstner@gmx.net> | |
| 22 */ | |
| 23 | |
| 24 #include "vim.h" | |
| 1666 | 25 |
| 7 | 26 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME |
| 27 /* Gnome redefines _() and N_(). Grrr... */ | |
| 28 # ifdef _ | |
| 29 # undef _ | |
| 30 # endif | |
| 31 # ifdef N_ | |
| 32 # undef N_ | |
| 33 # endif | |
| 34 # ifdef textdomain | |
| 35 # undef textdomain | |
| 36 # endif | |
| 37 # ifdef bindtextdomain | |
| 38 # undef bindtextdomain | |
| 39 # endif | |
| 1286 | 40 # ifdef bind_textdomain_codeset |
| 41 # undef bind_textdomain_codeset | |
| 1226 | 42 # endif |
| 7 | 43 # if defined(FEAT_GETTEXT) && !defined(ENABLE_NLS) |
| 44 # define ENABLE_NLS /* so the texts in the dialog boxes are translated */ | |
| 45 # endif | |
| 46 # include <gnome.h> | |
| 47 # include "version.h" | |
| 798 | 48 /* missing prototype in bonobo-dock-item.h */ |
| 49 extern void bonobo_dock_item_set_behavior(BonoboDockItem *dock_item, BonoboDockItemBehavior beh); | |
| 7 | 50 #endif |
| 51 | |
| 52 #if !defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) && defined(PROTO) | |
| 53 /* When generating prototypes we don't want syntax errors. */ | |
| 54 # define GdkAtom int | |
| 55 # define GdkEventExpose int | |
| 56 # define GdkEventFocus int | |
| 57 # define GdkEventVisibility int | |
| 58 # define GdkEventProperty int | |
| 59 # define GtkContainer int | |
| 60 # define GtkTargetEntry int | |
| 61 # define GtkType int | |
| 62 # define GtkWidget int | |
| 63 # define gint int | |
| 64 # define gpointer int | |
| 65 # define guint int | |
| 66 # define GdkEventKey int | |
| 67 # define GdkEventSelection int | |
| 68 # define GtkSelectionData int | |
| 69 # define GdkEventMotion int | |
| 70 # define GdkEventButton int | |
| 71 # define GdkDragContext int | |
| 72 # define GdkEventConfigure int | |
| 73 # define GdkEventClient int | |
| 74 #else | |
| 75 # include <gdk/gdkkeysyms.h> | |
| 76 # include <gdk/gdk.h> | |
| 77 # ifdef WIN3264 | |
| 78 # include <gdk/gdkwin32.h> | |
| 79 # else | |
| 80 # include <gdk/gdkx.h> | |
| 81 # endif | |
| 82 | |
| 83 # include <gtk/gtk.h> | |
| 84 # include "gui_gtk_f.h" | |
| 85 #endif | |
| 86 | |
| 87 #ifdef HAVE_X11_SUNKEYSYM_H | |
| 88 # include <X11/Sunkeysym.h> | |
| 2714 | 89 #endif |
| 90 | |
| 7 | 91 /* |
| 92 * Easy-to-use macro for multihead support. | |
| 93 */ | |
| 94 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD | |
| 95 # define GET_X_ATOM(atom) gdk_x11_atom_to_xatom_for_display( \ | |
| 96 gtk_widget_get_display(gui.mainwin), atom) | |
| 97 #else | |
| 98 # define GET_X_ATOM(atom) ((Atom)(atom)) | |
| 99 #endif | |
| 100 | |
| 101 /* Selection type distinguishers */ | |
| 102 enum | |
| 103 { | |
| 104 TARGET_TYPE_NONE, | |
| 105 TARGET_UTF8_STRING, | |
| 106 TARGET_STRING, | |
| 107 TARGET_COMPOUND_TEXT, | |
| 1904 | 108 TARGET_HTML, |
| 7 | 109 TARGET_TEXT, |
| 110 TARGET_TEXT_URI_LIST, | |
| 111 TARGET_TEXT_PLAIN, | |
| 112 TARGET_VIM, | |
| 113 TARGET_VIMENC | |
| 114 }; | |
| 115 | |
| 116 /* | |
| 117 * Table of selection targets supported by Vim. | |
| 118 * Note: Order matters, preferred types should come first. | |
| 119 */ | |
| 120 static const GtkTargetEntry selection_targets[] = | |
| 121 { | |
| 122 {VIMENC_ATOM_NAME, 0, TARGET_VIMENC}, | |
| 123 {VIM_ATOM_NAME, 0, TARGET_VIM}, | |
| 1904 | 124 {"text/html", 0, TARGET_HTML}, |
| 7 | 125 {"UTF8_STRING", 0, TARGET_UTF8_STRING}, |
| 126 {"COMPOUND_TEXT", 0, TARGET_COMPOUND_TEXT}, | |
| 127 {"TEXT", 0, TARGET_TEXT}, | |
| 128 {"STRING", 0, TARGET_STRING} | |
| 129 }; | |
| 130 #define N_SELECTION_TARGETS (sizeof(selection_targets) / sizeof(selection_targets[0])) | |
| 131 | |
| 132 #ifdef FEAT_DND | |
| 133 /* | |
| 134 * Table of DnD targets supported by Vim. | |
| 135 * Note: Order matters, preferred types should come first. | |
| 136 */ | |
| 137 static const GtkTargetEntry dnd_targets[] = | |
| 138 { | |
| 139 {"text/uri-list", 0, TARGET_TEXT_URI_LIST}, | |
| 1904 | 140 {"text/html", 0, TARGET_HTML}, |
| 7 | 141 {"UTF8_STRING", 0, TARGET_UTF8_STRING}, |
| 142 {"STRING", 0, TARGET_STRING}, | |
| 143 {"text/plain", 0, TARGET_TEXT_PLAIN} | |
| 144 }; | |
| 145 # define N_DND_TARGETS (sizeof(dnd_targets) / sizeof(dnd_targets[0])) | |
| 146 #endif | |
| 147 | |
| 148 | |
| 149 /* | |
| 150 * "Monospace" is a standard font alias that should be present | |
| 151 * on all proper Pango/fontconfig installations. | |
| 152 */ | |
| 153 # define DEFAULT_FONT "Monospace 10" | |
| 154 | |
| 155 #if !(defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION)) | |
| 156 /* | |
| 157 * Atoms used to communicate save-yourself from the X11 session manager. There | |
| 158 * is no need to move them into the GUI struct, since they should be constant. | |
| 159 */ | |
| 160 static GdkAtom wm_protocols_atom = GDK_NONE; | |
| 161 static GdkAtom save_yourself_atom = GDK_NONE; | |
| 162 #endif | |
| 163 | |
| 164 /* | |
| 165 * Atoms used to control/reference X11 selections. | |
| 166 */ | |
| 1904 | 167 static GdkAtom html_atom = GDK_NONE; |
| 7 | 168 static GdkAtom utf8_string_atom = GDK_NONE; |
| 169 static GdkAtom vim_atom = GDK_NONE; /* Vim's own special selection format */ | |
| 170 static GdkAtom vimenc_atom = GDK_NONE; /* Vim's extended selection format */ | |
| 171 | |
| 172 /* | |
| 173 * Keycodes recognized by vim. | |
| 174 * NOTE: when changing this, the table in gui_x11.c probably needs the same | |
| 175 * change! | |
| 176 */ | |
| 177 static struct special_key | |
| 178 { | |
| 179 guint key_sym; | |
| 180 char_u code0; | |
| 181 char_u code1; | |
| 182 } | |
| 183 const special_keys[] = | |
| 184 { | |
| 185 {GDK_Up, 'k', 'u'}, | |
| 186 {GDK_Down, 'k', 'd'}, | |
| 187 {GDK_Left, 'k', 'l'}, | |
| 188 {GDK_Right, 'k', 'r'}, | |
| 189 {GDK_F1, 'k', '1'}, | |
| 190 {GDK_F2, 'k', '2'}, | |
| 191 {GDK_F3, 'k', '3'}, | |
| 192 {GDK_F4, 'k', '4'}, | |
| 193 {GDK_F5, 'k', '5'}, | |
| 194 {GDK_F6, 'k', '6'}, | |
| 195 {GDK_F7, 'k', '7'}, | |
| 196 {GDK_F8, 'k', '8'}, | |
| 197 {GDK_F9, 'k', '9'}, | |
| 198 {GDK_F10, 'k', ';'}, | |
| 199 {GDK_F11, 'F', '1'}, | |
| 200 {GDK_F12, 'F', '2'}, | |
| 201 {GDK_F13, 'F', '3'}, | |
| 202 {GDK_F14, 'F', '4'}, | |
| 203 {GDK_F15, 'F', '5'}, | |
| 204 {GDK_F16, 'F', '6'}, | |
| 205 {GDK_F17, 'F', '7'}, | |
| 206 {GDK_F18, 'F', '8'}, | |
| 207 {GDK_F19, 'F', '9'}, | |
| 208 {GDK_F20, 'F', 'A'}, | |
| 209 {GDK_F21, 'F', 'B'}, | |
| 210 {GDK_Pause, 'F', 'B'}, /* Pause == F21 according to netbeans.txt */ | |
| 211 {GDK_F22, 'F', 'C'}, | |
| 212 {GDK_F23, 'F', 'D'}, | |
| 213 {GDK_F24, 'F', 'E'}, | |
| 214 {GDK_F25, 'F', 'F'}, | |
| 215 {GDK_F26, 'F', 'G'}, | |
| 216 {GDK_F27, 'F', 'H'}, | |
| 217 {GDK_F28, 'F', 'I'}, | |
| 218 {GDK_F29, 'F', 'J'}, | |
| 219 {GDK_F30, 'F', 'K'}, | |
| 220 {GDK_F31, 'F', 'L'}, | |
| 221 {GDK_F32, 'F', 'M'}, | |
| 222 {GDK_F33, 'F', 'N'}, | |
| 223 {GDK_F34, 'F', 'O'}, | |
| 224 {GDK_F35, 'F', 'P'}, | |
| 225 #ifdef SunXK_F36 | |
| 226 {SunXK_F36, 'F', 'Q'}, | |
| 227 {SunXK_F37, 'F', 'R'}, | |
| 228 #endif | |
| 229 {GDK_Help, '%', '1'}, | |
| 230 {GDK_Undo, '&', '8'}, | |
| 231 {GDK_BackSpace, 'k', 'b'}, | |
| 232 {GDK_Insert, 'k', 'I'}, | |
| 233 {GDK_Delete, 'k', 'D'}, | |
| 234 {GDK_3270_BackTab, 'k', 'B'}, | |
| 235 {GDK_Clear, 'k', 'C'}, | |
| 236 {GDK_Home, 'k', 'h'}, | |
| 237 {GDK_End, '@', '7'}, | |
| 238 {GDK_Prior, 'k', 'P'}, | |
| 239 {GDK_Next, 'k', 'N'}, | |
| 240 {GDK_Print, '%', '9'}, | |
| 241 /* Keypad keys: */ | |
| 242 {GDK_KP_Left, 'k', 'l'}, | |
| 243 {GDK_KP_Right, 'k', 'r'}, | |
| 244 {GDK_KP_Up, 'k', 'u'}, | |
| 245 {GDK_KP_Down, 'k', 'd'}, | |
| 246 {GDK_KP_Insert, KS_EXTRA, (char_u)KE_KINS}, | |
| 247 {GDK_KP_Delete, KS_EXTRA, (char_u)KE_KDEL}, | |
| 248 {GDK_KP_Home, 'K', '1'}, | |
| 249 {GDK_KP_End, 'K', '4'}, | |
| 250 {GDK_KP_Prior, 'K', '3'}, /* page up */ | |
| 251 {GDK_KP_Next, 'K', '5'}, /* page down */ | |
| 252 | |
| 253 {GDK_KP_Add, 'K', '6'}, | |
| 254 {GDK_KP_Subtract, 'K', '7'}, | |
| 255 {GDK_KP_Divide, 'K', '8'}, | |
| 256 {GDK_KP_Multiply, 'K', '9'}, | |
| 257 {GDK_KP_Enter, 'K', 'A'}, | |
| 258 {GDK_KP_Decimal, 'K', 'B'}, | |
| 259 | |
| 260 {GDK_KP_0, 'K', 'C'}, | |
| 261 {GDK_KP_1, 'K', 'D'}, | |
| 262 {GDK_KP_2, 'K', 'E'}, | |
| 263 {GDK_KP_3, 'K', 'F'}, | |
| 264 {GDK_KP_4, 'K', 'G'}, | |
| 265 {GDK_KP_5, 'K', 'H'}, | |
| 266 {GDK_KP_6, 'K', 'I'}, | |
| 267 {GDK_KP_7, 'K', 'J'}, | |
| 268 {GDK_KP_8, 'K', 'K'}, | |
| 269 {GDK_KP_9, 'K', 'L'}, | |
| 270 | |
| 271 /* End of list marker: */ | |
| 272 {0, 0, 0} | |
| 273 }; | |
| 274 | |
| 275 /* | |
| 276 * Flags for command line options table below. | |
| 277 */ | |
| 278 #define ARG_FONT 1 | |
| 279 #define ARG_GEOMETRY 2 | |
| 280 #define ARG_REVERSE 3 | |
| 281 #define ARG_NOREVERSE 4 | |
| 282 #define ARG_BACKGROUND 5 | |
| 283 #define ARG_FOREGROUND 6 | |
| 284 #define ARG_ICONIC 7 | |
| 285 #define ARG_ROLE 8 | |
| 286 #define ARG_NETBEANS 9 | |
| 287 #define ARG_XRM 10 /* ignored */ | |
| 288 #define ARG_MENUFONT 11 /* ignored */ | |
| 289 #define ARG_INDEX_MASK 0x00ff | |
| 290 #define ARG_HAS_VALUE 0x0100 /* a value is expected after the argument */ | |
| 291 #define ARG_NEEDS_GUI 0x0200 /* need to initialize the GUI for this */ | |
| 292 #define ARG_FOR_GTK 0x0400 /* argument is handled by GTK+ or GNOME */ | |
| 293 #define ARG_COMPAT_LONG 0x0800 /* accept -foo but substitute with --foo */ | |
| 294 #define ARG_KEEP 0x1000 /* don't remove argument from argv[] */ | |
| 295 | |
| 296 /* | |
| 297 * This table holds all the X GUI command line options allowed. This includes | |
| 298 * the standard ones so that we can skip them when Vim is started without the | |
| 299 * GUI (but the GUI might start up later). | |
| 300 * | |
| 301 * When changing this, also update doc/gui_x11.txt and the usage message!!! | |
| 302 */ | |
| 303 typedef struct | |
| 304 { | |
| 305 const char *name; | |
| 306 unsigned int flags; | |
| 307 } | |
| 308 cmdline_option_T; | |
| 309 | |
| 310 static const cmdline_option_T cmdline_options[] = | |
| 311 { | |
| 312 /* We handle these options ourselves */ | |
| 313 {"-fn", ARG_FONT|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 314 {"-font", ARG_FONT|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 315 {"-geom", ARG_GEOMETRY|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 316 {"-geometry", ARG_GEOMETRY|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 317 {"-rv", ARG_REVERSE}, | |
| 318 {"-reverse", ARG_REVERSE}, | |
| 319 {"+rv", ARG_NOREVERSE}, | |
| 320 {"+reverse", ARG_NOREVERSE}, | |
| 321 {"-bg", ARG_BACKGROUND|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 322 {"-background", ARG_BACKGROUND|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 323 {"-fg", ARG_FOREGROUND|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 324 {"-foreground", ARG_FOREGROUND|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 325 {"-iconic", ARG_ICONIC}, | |
| 326 {"--role", ARG_ROLE|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 327 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG | |
| 328 {"-nb", ARG_NETBEANS}, /* non-standard value format */ | |
| 329 {"-xrm", ARG_XRM|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, /* not implemented */ | |
| 330 {"-mf", ARG_MENUFONT|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, /* not implemented */ | |
| 331 {"-menufont", ARG_MENUFONT|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, /* not implemented */ | |
| 332 #endif | |
| 333 /* Arguments handled by GTK (and GNOME) internally. */ | |
| 334 {"--g-fatal-warnings", ARG_FOR_GTK}, | |
| 335 {"--gdk-debug", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 336 {"--gdk-no-debug", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 337 {"--gtk-debug", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 338 {"--gtk-no-debug", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 339 {"--gtk-module", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 340 {"--sync", ARG_FOR_GTK}, | |
| 341 {"--display", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE|ARG_COMPAT_LONG}, | |
| 342 {"--name", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE|ARG_COMPAT_LONG}, | |
| 343 {"--class", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE|ARG_COMPAT_LONG}, | |
| 344 {"--screen", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 345 {"--gxid-host", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 346 {"--gxid-port", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 347 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME | |
| 348 {"--load-modules", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 349 {"--sm-client-id", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 350 {"--sm-config-prefix", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 351 {"--sm-disable", ARG_FOR_GTK}, | |
| 352 {"--oaf-ior-fd", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 353 {"--oaf-activate-iid", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 354 {"--oaf-private", ARG_FOR_GTK}, | |
| 355 {"--enable-sound", ARG_FOR_GTK}, | |
| 356 {"--disable-sound", ARG_FOR_GTK}, | |
| 357 {"--espeaker", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 358 {"-?", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_NEEDS_GUI}, | |
| 359 {"--help", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_NEEDS_GUI|ARG_KEEP}, | |
| 360 {"--usage", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_NEEDS_GUI}, | |
| 361 # if 0 /* conflicts with Vim's own --version argument */ | |
| 362 {"--version", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_NEEDS_GUI}, | |
| 363 # endif | |
| 364 {"--disable-crash-dialog", ARG_FOR_GTK}, | |
| 365 #endif | |
| 366 {NULL, 0} | |
| 367 }; | |
| 368 | |
| 369 static int gui_argc = 0; | |
| 370 static char **gui_argv = NULL; | |
| 371 | |
| 372 static const char *role_argument = NULL; | |
| 373 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION) | |
| 374 static const char *restart_command = NULL; | |
| 1898 | 375 static char *abs_restart_command = NULL; |
| 7 | 376 #endif |
| 377 static int found_iconic_arg = FALSE; | |
| 378 | |
| 379 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME | |
| 380 /* | |
| 381 * Can't use Gnome if --socketid given | |
| 382 */ | |
| 383 static int using_gnome = 0; | |
| 384 #else | |
| 385 # define using_gnome 0 | |
| 386 #endif | |
| 387 | |
| 388 /* | |
| 389 * Parse the GUI related command-line arguments. Any arguments used are | |
| 390 * deleted from argv, and *argc is decremented accordingly. This is called | |
| 391 * when vim is started, whether or not the GUI has been started. | |
| 392 */ | |
| 393 void | |
| 394 gui_mch_prepare(int *argc, char **argv) | |
| 395 { | |
| 396 const cmdline_option_T *option; | |
| 397 int i = 0; | |
| 398 int len = 0; | |
| 399 | |
| 400 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION) | |
| 401 /* | |
| 402 * Determine the command used to invoke Vim, to be passed as restart | |
| 403 * command to the session manager. If argv[0] contains any directory | |
| 404 * components try building an absolute path, otherwise leave it as is. | |
| 405 */ | |
| 406 restart_command = argv[0]; | |
| 407 | |
| 408 if (strchr(argv[0], G_DIR_SEPARATOR) != NULL) | |
| 409 { | |
| 410 char_u buf[MAXPATHL]; | |
| 411 | |
| 412 if (mch_FullName((char_u *)argv[0], buf, (int)sizeof(buf), TRUE) == OK) | |
| 1898 | 413 { |
| 414 abs_restart_command = (char *)vim_strsave(buf); | |
| 415 restart_command = abs_restart_command; | |
| 416 } | |
| 7 | 417 } |
| 418 #endif | |
| 419 | |
| 420 /* | |
| 421 * Move all the entries in argv which are relevant to GTK+ and GNOME | |
| 422 * into gui_argv. Freed later in gui_mch_init(). | |
| 423 */ | |
| 424 gui_argc = 0; | |
| 425 gui_argv = (char **)alloc((unsigned)((*argc + 1) * sizeof(char *))); | |
| 426 | |
| 427 g_return_if_fail(gui_argv != NULL); | |
| 428 | |
| 429 gui_argv[gui_argc++] = argv[i++]; | |
| 430 | |
| 431 while (i < *argc) | |
| 432 { | |
| 433 /* Don't waste CPU cycles on non-option arguments. */ | |
| 434 if (argv[i][0] != '-' && argv[i][0] != '+') | |
| 435 { | |
| 436 ++i; | |
| 437 continue; | |
| 438 } | |
| 439 | |
| 440 /* Look for argv[i] in cmdline_options[] table. */ | |
| 441 for (option = &cmdline_options[0]; option->name != NULL; ++option) | |
| 442 { | |
| 443 len = strlen(option->name); | |
| 444 | |
| 445 if (strncmp(argv[i], option->name, len) == 0) | |
| 446 { | |
| 447 if (argv[i][len] == '\0') | |
| 448 break; | |
| 449 /* allow --foo=bar style */ | |
| 450 if (argv[i][len] == '=' && (option->flags & ARG_HAS_VALUE)) | |
| 451 break; | |
| 452 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG | |
| 453 /* darn, -nb has non-standard syntax */ | |
| 454 if (vim_strchr((char_u *)":=", argv[i][len]) != NULL | |
| 455 && (option->flags & ARG_INDEX_MASK) == ARG_NETBEANS) | |
| 456 break; | |
| 457 #endif | |
| 458 } | |
| 459 else if ((option->flags & ARG_COMPAT_LONG) | |
| 460 && strcmp(argv[i], option->name + 1) == 0) | |
| 461 { | |
| 462 /* Replace the standard X arguments "-name" and "-display" | |
| 463 * with their GNU-style long option counterparts. */ | |
| 464 argv[i] = (char *)option->name; | |
| 465 break; | |
| 466 } | |
| 467 } | |
| 468 if (option->name == NULL) /* no match */ | |
| 469 { | |
| 470 ++i; | |
| 471 continue; | |
| 472 } | |
| 473 | |
| 474 if (option->flags & ARG_FOR_GTK) | |
| 475 { | |
| 476 /* Move the argument into gui_argv, which | |
| 477 * will later be passed to gtk_init_check() */ | |
| 478 gui_argv[gui_argc++] = argv[i]; | |
| 479 } | |
| 480 else | |
| 481 { | |
| 482 char *value = NULL; | |
| 483 | |
| 484 /* Extract the option's value if there is one. | |
| 485 * Accept both "--foo bar" and "--foo=bar" style. */ | |
| 486 if (option->flags & ARG_HAS_VALUE) | |
| 487 { | |
| 488 if (argv[i][len] == '=') | |
| 489 value = &argv[i][len + 1]; | |
| 490 else if (i + 1 < *argc && strcmp(argv[i + 1], "--") != 0) | |
| 491 value = argv[i + 1]; | |
| 492 } | |
| 493 | |
| 494 /* Check for options handled by Vim itself */ | |
| 495 switch (option->flags & ARG_INDEX_MASK) | |
| 496 { | |
| 497 case ARG_REVERSE: | |
| 498 found_reverse_arg = TRUE; | |
| 499 break; | |
| 500 case ARG_NOREVERSE: | |
| 501 found_reverse_arg = FALSE; | |
| 502 break; | |
| 503 case ARG_FONT: | |
| 504 font_argument = value; | |
| 505 break; | |
| 506 case ARG_GEOMETRY: | |
| 507 if (value != NULL) | |
| 508 gui.geom = vim_strsave((char_u *)value); | |
| 509 break; | |
| 510 case ARG_BACKGROUND: | |
| 511 background_argument = value; | |
| 512 break; | |
| 513 case ARG_FOREGROUND: | |
| 514 foreground_argument = value; | |
| 515 break; | |
| 516 case ARG_ICONIC: | |
| 517 found_iconic_arg = TRUE; | |
| 518 break; | |
| 519 case ARG_ROLE: | |
| 520 role_argument = value; /* used later in gui_mch_open() */ | |
| 521 break; | |
| 522 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG | |
| 523 case ARG_NETBEANS: | |
| 524 gui.dofork = FALSE; /* don't fork() when starting GUI */ | |
| 525 netbeansArg = argv[i]; | |
| 526 break; | |
| 527 #endif | |
| 528 default: | |
| 529 break; | |
| 530 } | |
| 531 } | |
| 532 | |
| 533 /* These arguments make gnome_program_init() print a message and exit. | |
| 534 * Must start the GUI for this, otherwise ":gui" will exit later! */ | |
| 535 if (option->flags & ARG_NEEDS_GUI) | |
| 536 gui.starting = TRUE; | |
| 537 | |
| 538 if (option->flags & ARG_KEEP) | |
| 539 ++i; | |
| 540 else | |
| 541 { | |
| 542 /* Remove the flag from the argument vector. */ | |
| 543 if (--*argc > i) | |
| 544 { | |
| 545 int n_strip = 1; | |
| 546 | |
| 547 /* Move the argument's value as well, if there is one. */ | |
| 548 if ((option->flags & ARG_HAS_VALUE) | |
| 549 && argv[i][len] != '=' | |
| 550 && strcmp(argv[i + 1], "--") != 0) | |
| 551 { | |
| 552 ++n_strip; | |
| 553 --*argc; | |
| 554 if (option->flags & ARG_FOR_GTK) | |
| 555 gui_argv[gui_argc++] = argv[i + 1]; | |
| 556 } | |
| 557 | |
| 558 if (*argc > i) | |
| 559 mch_memmove(&argv[i], &argv[i + n_strip], | |
| 560 (*argc - i) * sizeof(char *)); | |
| 561 } | |
| 562 argv[*argc] = NULL; | |
| 563 } | |
| 564 } | |
| 565 | |
| 566 gui_argv[gui_argc] = NULL; | |
| 567 } | |
| 568 | |
| 359 | 569 #if defined(EXITFREE) || defined(PROTO) |
| 570 void | |
| 571 gui_mch_free_all() | |
| 572 { | |
| 573 vim_free(gui_argv); | |
| 1898 | 574 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION) |
| 575 vim_free(abs_restart_command); | |
| 576 #endif | |
| 359 | 577 } |
| 578 #endif | |
| 579 | |
| 7 | 580 /* |
| 581 * This should be maybe completely removed. | |
| 582 * Doesn't seem possible, since check_copy_area() relies on | |
| 583 * this information. --danielk | |
| 584 */ | |
| 585 static gint | |
| 1884 | 586 visibility_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
| 587 GdkEventVisibility *event, | |
| 588 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
| 7 | 589 { |
| 590 gui.visibility = event->state; | |
| 591 /* | |
| 592 * When we do an gdk_window_copy_area(), and the window is partially | |
| 593 * obscured, we want to receive an event to tell us whether it worked | |
| 594 * or not. | |
| 595 */ | |
| 596 if (gui.text_gc != NULL) | |
| 597 gdk_gc_set_exposures(gui.text_gc, | |
| 598 gui.visibility != GDK_VISIBILITY_UNOBSCURED); | |
| 599 return FALSE; | |
| 600 } | |
| 601 | |
| 602 /* | |
| 603 * Redraw the corresponding portions of the screen. | |
| 604 */ | |
| 605 static gint | |
| 1884 | 606 expose_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
| 607 GdkEventExpose *event, | |
| 608 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
| 7 | 609 { |
| 610 /* Skip this when the GUI isn't set up yet, will redraw later. */ | |
| 611 if (gui.starting) | |
| 612 return FALSE; | |
| 613 | |
| 614 out_flush(); /* make sure all output has been processed */ | |
| 615 gui_redraw(event->area.x, event->area.y, | |
| 616 event->area.width, event->area.height); | |
| 617 | |
| 618 /* Clear the border areas if needed */ | |
| 619 if (event->area.x < FILL_X(0)) | |
| 620 gdk_window_clear_area(gui.drawarea->window, 0, 0, FILL_X(0), 0); | |
| 621 if (event->area.y < FILL_Y(0)) | |
| 622 gdk_window_clear_area(gui.drawarea->window, 0, 0, 0, FILL_Y(0)); | |
| 623 if (event->area.x > FILL_X(Columns)) | |
| 624 gdk_window_clear_area(gui.drawarea->window, | |
| 625 FILL_X((int)Columns), 0, 0, 0); | |
| 626 if (event->area.y > FILL_Y(Rows)) | |
| 627 gdk_window_clear_area(gui.drawarea->window, 0, FILL_Y((int)Rows), 0, 0); | |
| 628 | |
| 629 return FALSE; | |
| 630 } | |
| 631 | |
| 632 #ifdef FEAT_CLIENTSERVER | |
| 633 /* | |
| 634 * Handle changes to the "Comm" property | |
| 635 */ | |
| 636 static gint | |
| 1884 | 637 property_event(GtkWidget *widget, |
| 638 GdkEventProperty *event, | |
| 639 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
| 7 | 640 { |
| 641 if (event->type == GDK_PROPERTY_NOTIFY | |
| 642 && event->state == (int)GDK_PROPERTY_NEW_VALUE | |
| 643 && GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(event->window) == commWindow | |
| 644 && GET_X_ATOM(event->atom) == commProperty) | |
| 645 { | |
| 646 XEvent xev; | |
| 647 | |
| 648 /* Translate to XLib */ | |
| 649 xev.xproperty.type = PropertyNotify; | |
| 650 xev.xproperty.atom = commProperty; | |
| 651 xev.xproperty.window = commWindow; | |
| 652 xev.xproperty.state = PropertyNewValue; | |
| 653 serverEventProc(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(widget->window), &xev); | |
| 654 } | |
| 655 return FALSE; | |
| 656 } | |
| 657 #endif | |
| 658 | |
| 659 | |
| 660 /**************************************************************************** | |
| 661 * Focus handlers: | |
| 662 */ | |
| 663 | |
| 664 | |
| 665 /* | |
| 666 * This is a simple state machine: | |
| 667 * BLINK_NONE not blinking at all | |
| 668 * BLINK_OFF blinking, cursor is not shown | |
| 669 * BLINK_ON blinking, cursor is shown | |
| 670 */ | |
| 671 | |
| 672 #define BLINK_NONE 0 | |
| 673 #define BLINK_OFF 1 | |
| 674 #define BLINK_ON 2 | |
| 675 | |
| 676 static int blink_state = BLINK_NONE; | |
| 677 static long_u blink_waittime = 700; | |
| 678 static long_u blink_ontime = 400; | |
| 679 static long_u blink_offtime = 250; | |
| 680 static guint blink_timer = 0; | |
| 681 | |
| 682 void | |
| 683 gui_mch_set_blinking(long waittime, long on, long off) | |
| 684 { | |
| 685 blink_waittime = waittime; | |
| 686 blink_ontime = on; | |
| 687 blink_offtime = off; | |
| 688 } | |
| 689 | |
| 690 /* | |
| 691 * Stop the cursor blinking. Show the cursor if it wasn't shown. | |
| 692 */ | |
| 693 void | |
| 694 gui_mch_stop_blink(void) | |
| 695 { | |
| 696 if (blink_timer) | |
| 697 { | |
| 698 gtk_timeout_remove(blink_timer); | |
| 699 blink_timer = 0; | |
| 700 } | |
| 701 if (blink_state == BLINK_OFF) | |
| 702 gui_update_cursor(TRUE, FALSE); | |
| 703 blink_state = BLINK_NONE; | |
| 704 } | |
| 705 | |
| 706 static gint | |
| 1884 | 707 blink_cb(gpointer data UNUSED) |
| 7 | 708 { |
| 709 if (blink_state == BLINK_ON) | |
| 710 { | |
| 711 gui_undraw_cursor(); | |
| 712 blink_state = BLINK_OFF; | |
| 713 blink_timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)blink_offtime, | |
| 714 (GtkFunction) blink_cb, NULL); | |
| 715 } | |
| 716 else | |
| 717 { | |
| 718 gui_update_cursor(TRUE, FALSE); | |
| 719 blink_state = BLINK_ON; | |
| 720 blink_timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)blink_ontime, | |
| 721 (GtkFunction) blink_cb, NULL); | |
| 722 } | |
| 723 | |
| 724 return FALSE; /* don't happen again */ | |
| 725 } | |
| 726 | |
| 727 /* | |
| 728 * Start the cursor blinking. If it was already blinking, this restarts the | |
| 729 * waiting time and shows the cursor. | |
| 730 */ | |
| 731 void | |
| 732 gui_mch_start_blink(void) | |
| 733 { | |
| 734 if (blink_timer) | |
| 735 gtk_timeout_remove(blink_timer); | |
| 736 /* Only switch blinking on if none of the times is zero */ | |
| 737 if (blink_waittime && blink_ontime && blink_offtime && gui.in_focus) | |
| 738 { | |
| 739 blink_timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)blink_waittime, | |
| 740 (GtkFunction) blink_cb, NULL); | |
| 741 blink_state = BLINK_ON; | |
| 742 gui_update_cursor(TRUE, FALSE); | |
| 743 } | |
| 744 } | |
| 745 | |
| 746 static gint | |
| 1884 | 747 enter_notify_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
| 748 GdkEventCrossing *event UNUSED, | |
| 749 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
| 7 | 750 { |
| 751 if (blink_state == BLINK_NONE) | |
| 752 gui_mch_start_blink(); | |
| 753 | |
| 754 /* make sure keyboard input goes there */ | |
| 755 if (gtk_socket_id == 0 || !GTK_WIDGET_HAS_FOCUS(gui.drawarea)) | |
| 756 gtk_widget_grab_focus(gui.drawarea); | |
| 757 | |
| 758 return FALSE; | |
| 759 } | |
| 760 | |
| 761 static gint | |
| 1884 | 762 leave_notify_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
| 763 GdkEventCrossing *event UNUSED, | |
| 764 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
| 7 | 765 { |
| 766 if (blink_state != BLINK_NONE) | |
| 767 gui_mch_stop_blink(); | |
| 768 | |
| 769 return FALSE; | |
| 770 } | |
| 771 | |
| 772 static gint | |
| 1884 | 773 focus_in_event(GtkWidget *widget, |
| 774 GdkEventFocus *event UNUSED, | |
| 775 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
| 7 | 776 { |
| 777 gui_focus_change(TRUE); | |
| 778 | |
| 779 if (blink_state == BLINK_NONE) | |
| 780 gui_mch_start_blink(); | |
| 781 | |
| 1380 | 782 /* make sure keyboard input goes to the draw area (if this is focus for a |
| 783 * window) */ | |
| 791 | 784 if (widget != gui.drawarea) |
| 856 | 785 gtk_widget_grab_focus(gui.drawarea); |
| 7 | 786 |
| 787 return TRUE; | |
| 788 } | |
| 789 | |
| 790 static gint | |
| 1884 | 791 focus_out_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
|
2311
ccda151dde4e
Support completion for ":find". (Nazri Ramliy)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2301
diff
changeset
|
792 GdkEventFocus *event UNUSED, |
| 1884 | 793 gpointer data UNUSED) |
| 7 | 794 { |
| 795 gui_focus_change(FALSE); | |
| 796 | |
| 797 if (blink_state != BLINK_NONE) | |
| 798 gui_mch_stop_blink(); | |
| 799 | |
| 800 return TRUE; | |
| 801 } | |
| 802 | |
| 803 | |
| 804 /* | |
| 805 * Translate a GDK key value to UTF-8 independently of the current locale. | |
| 806 * The output is written to string, which must have room for at least 6 bytes | |
| 807 * plus the NUL terminator. Returns the length in bytes. | |
| 808 * | |
| 809 * This function is used in the GTK+ 2 GUI only. The GTK+ 1 code makes use | |
| 810 * of GdkEventKey::string instead. But event->string is evil; see here why: | |
| 811 * http://developer.gnome.org/doc/API/2.0/gdk/gdk-Event-Structures.html#GdkEventKey | |
| 812 */ | |
| 813 static int | |
| 814 keyval_to_string(unsigned int keyval, unsigned int state, char_u *string) | |
| 815 { | |
| 816 int len; | |
| 817 guint32 uc; | |
| 818 | |
| 819 uc = gdk_keyval_to_unicode(keyval); | |
| 820 if (uc != 0) | |
| 821 { | |
| 822 /* Check for CTRL-foo */ | |
| 823 if ((state & GDK_CONTROL_MASK) && uc >= 0x20 && uc < 0x80) | |
| 824 { | |
| 825 /* These mappings look arbitrary at the first glance, but in fact | |
| 826 * resemble quite exactly the behaviour of the GTK+ 1.2 GUI on my | |
| 827 * machine. The only difference is BS vs. DEL for CTRL-8 (makes | |
| 828 * more sense and is consistent with usual terminal behaviour). */ | |
| 829 if (uc >= '@') | |
| 830 string[0] = uc & 0x1F; | |
| 831 else if (uc == '2') | |
| 832 string[0] = NUL; | |
| 833 else if (uc >= '3' && uc <= '7') | |
| 834 string[0] = uc ^ 0x28; | |
| 835 else if (uc == '8') | |
| 836 string[0] = BS; | |
| 837 else if (uc == '?') | |
| 838 string[0] = DEL; | |
| 839 else | |
| 840 string[0] = uc; | |
| 841 len = 1; | |
| 842 } | |
| 843 else | |
| 844 { | |
| 845 /* Translate a normal key to UTF-8. This doesn't work for dead | |
| 846 * keys of course, you _have_ to use an input method for that. */ | |
| 847 len = utf_char2bytes((int)uc, string); | |
| 848 } | |
| 849 } | |
| 850 else | |
| 851 { | |
| 852 /* Translate keys which are represented by ASCII control codes in Vim. | |
| 853 * There are only a few of those; most control keys are translated to | |
| 854 * special terminal-like control sequences. */ | |
| 855 len = 1; | |
| 856 switch (keyval) | |
| 857 { | |
| 858 case GDK_Tab: case GDK_KP_Tab: case GDK_ISO_Left_Tab: | |
| 859 string[0] = TAB; | |
| 860 break; | |
| 861 case GDK_Linefeed: | |
| 862 string[0] = NL; | |
| 863 break; | |
| 864 case GDK_Return: case GDK_ISO_Enter: case GDK_3270_Enter: | |
| 865 string[0] = CAR; | |
| 866 break; | |
| 867 case GDK_Escape: | |
| 868 string[0] = ESC; | |
| 869 break; | |
| 870 default: | |
| 871 len = 0; | |
| 872 break; | |
| 873 } | |
| 874 } | |
| 875 string[len] = NUL; | |
| 876 | |
| 877 return len; | |
| 878 } | |
| 879 | |
| 179 | 880 static int |
| 881 modifiers_gdk2vim(guint state) | |
| 882 { | |
| 883 int modifiers = 0; | |
| 884 | |
| 885 if (state & GDK_SHIFT_MASK) | |
| 886 modifiers |= MOD_MASK_SHIFT; | |
| 887 if (state & GDK_CONTROL_MASK) | |
| 888 modifiers |= MOD_MASK_CTRL; | |
| 889 if (state & GDK_MOD1_MASK) | |
| 890 modifiers |= MOD_MASK_ALT; | |
|
2550
7c1f73452ea6
Fix #ifdef for GDK_SUPER_MASK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2520
diff
changeset
|
891 #if GTK_CHECK_VERSION(2,10,0) |
|
2188
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
892 if (state & GDK_SUPER_MASK) |
|
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
893 modifiers |= MOD_MASK_META; |
|
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
894 #endif |
| 179 | 895 if (state & GDK_MOD4_MASK) |
| 896 modifiers |= MOD_MASK_META; | |
| 897 | |
| 898 return modifiers; | |
| 899 } | |
| 900 | |
| 901 static int | |
| 902 modifiers_gdk2mouse(guint state) | |
| 903 { | |
| 904 int modifiers = 0; | |
| 905 | |
| 906 if (state & GDK_SHIFT_MASK) | |
| 907 modifiers |= MOUSE_SHIFT; | |
| 908 if (state & GDK_CONTROL_MASK) | |
| 909 modifiers |= MOUSE_CTRL; | |
| 910 if (state & GDK_MOD1_MASK) | |
| 911 modifiers |= MOUSE_ALT; | |
| 912 | |
| 913 return modifiers; | |
| 914 } | |
| 915 | |
| 7 | 916 /* |
| 917 * Main keyboard handler: | |
| 918 */ | |
| 919 static gint | |
| 1884 | 920 key_press_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
| 921 GdkEventKey *event, | |
| 922 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
| 7 | 923 { |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
924 /* For GTK+ 2 we know for sure how large the string might get. |
| 7 | 925 * (That is, up to 6 bytes + NUL + CSI escapes + safety measure.) */ |
| 926 char_u string[32], string2[32]; | |
| 927 guint key_sym; | |
| 928 int len; | |
| 929 int i; | |
| 930 int modifiers; | |
| 931 int key; | |
| 932 guint state; | |
| 933 char_u *s, *d; | |
| 934 | |
| 2923 | 935 gui.event_time = event->time; |
| 7 | 936 key_sym = event->keyval; |
| 937 state = event->state; | |
| 938 | |
| 939 #ifdef FEAT_XIM | |
| 940 if (xim_queue_key_press_event(event, TRUE)) | |
| 941 return TRUE; | |
| 942 #endif | |
| 943 | |
| 944 #ifdef FEAT_HANGULIN | |
| 945 if (key_sym == GDK_space && (state & GDK_SHIFT_MASK)) | |
| 946 { | |
| 947 hangul_input_state_toggle(); | |
| 948 return TRUE; | |
| 949 } | |
| 950 #endif | |
| 951 | |
| 952 #ifdef SunXK_F36 | |
| 953 /* | |
| 954 * These keys have bogus lookup strings, and trapping them here is | |
| 955 * easier than trying to XRebindKeysym() on them with every possible | |
| 956 * combination of modifiers. | |
| 957 */ | |
| 958 if (key_sym == SunXK_F36 || key_sym == SunXK_F37) | |
| 959 len = 0; | |
| 960 else | |
| 961 #endif | |
| 962 { | |
| 963 len = keyval_to_string(key_sym, state, string2); | |
| 964 | |
| 965 /* Careful: convert_input() doesn't handle the NUL character. | |
| 966 * No need to convert pure ASCII anyway, thus the len > 1 check. */ | |
| 967 if (len > 1 && input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
| 968 len = convert_input(string2, len, sizeof(string2)); | |
| 969 | |
| 970 s = string2; | |
| 971 d = string; | |
| 972 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i) | |
| 973 { | |
| 974 *d++ = s[i]; | |
| 975 if (d[-1] == CSI && d + 2 < string + sizeof(string)) | |
| 976 { | |
| 977 /* Turn CSI into K_CSI. */ | |
| 978 *d++ = KS_EXTRA; | |
| 979 *d++ = (int)KE_CSI; | |
| 980 } | |
| 981 } | |
| 982 len = d - string; | |
| 983 } | |
| 984 | |
| 985 /* Shift-Tab results in Left_Tab, but we want <S-Tab> */ | |
| 986 if (key_sym == GDK_ISO_Left_Tab) | |
| 987 { | |
| 988 key_sym = GDK_Tab; | |
| 989 state |= GDK_SHIFT_MASK; | |
| 990 } | |
| 991 | |
| 992 #ifdef FEAT_MENU | |
| 993 /* If there is a menu and 'wak' is "yes", or 'wak' is "menu" and the key | |
| 994 * is a menu shortcut, we ignore everything with the ALT modifier. */ | |
| 995 if ((state & GDK_MOD1_MASK) | |
| 996 && gui.menu_is_active | |
| 997 && (*p_wak == 'y' | |
| 998 || (*p_wak == 'm' | |
| 999 && len == 1 | |
| 1000 && gui_is_menu_shortcut(string[0])))) | |
| 1001 /* For GTK2 we return false to signify that we haven't handled the | |
| 1002 * keypress, so that gtk will handle the mnemonic or accelerator. */ | |
| 1003 return FALSE; | |
| 1004 #endif | |
| 1005 | |
| 1006 /* Check for Alt/Meta key (Mod1Mask), but not for a BS, DEL or character | |
| 1007 * that already has the 8th bit set. | |
| 1008 * Don't do this for <S-M-Tab>, that should become K_S_TAB with ALT. | |
| 1009 * Don't do this for double-byte encodings, it turns the char into a lead | |
| 1010 * byte. */ | |
| 1011 if (len == 1 | |
|
2188
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1012 && ((state & GDK_MOD1_MASK) |
|
2571
42bdbc2bbb59
Fix #ifdef for GDK_SUPER_MASK. (Stephan Schulz)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2550
diff
changeset
|
1013 #if GTK_CHECK_VERSION(2,10,0) |
|
2188
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1014 || (state & GDK_SUPER_MASK) |
|
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1015 #endif |
|
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1016 ) |
| 7 | 1017 && !(key_sym == GDK_BackSpace || key_sym == GDK_Delete) |
| 1018 && (string[0] & 0x80) == 0 | |
| 1019 && !(key_sym == GDK_Tab && (state & GDK_SHIFT_MASK)) | |
| 1020 && !enc_dbcs | |
| 1021 ) | |
| 1022 { | |
| 1023 string[0] |= 0x80; | |
| 1024 state &= ~GDK_MOD1_MASK; /* don't use it again */ | |
| 1025 if (enc_utf8) /* convert to utf-8 */ | |
| 1026 { | |
| 1027 string[1] = string[0] & 0xbf; | |
| 1028 string[0] = ((unsigned)string[0] >> 6) + 0xc0; | |
| 1029 if (string[1] == CSI) | |
| 1030 { | |
| 1031 string[2] = KS_EXTRA; | |
| 1032 string[3] = (int)KE_CSI; | |
| 1033 len = 4; | |
| 1034 } | |
| 1035 else | |
| 1036 len = 2; | |
| 1037 } | |
| 1038 } | |
| 1039 | |
| 1040 /* Check for special keys. Also do this when len == 1 (key has an ASCII | |
| 1041 * value) to detect backspace, delete and keypad keys. */ | |
| 1042 if (len == 0 || len == 1) | |
| 1043 { | |
| 1044 for (i = 0; special_keys[i].key_sym != 0; i++) | |
| 1045 { | |
| 1046 if (special_keys[i].key_sym == key_sym) | |
| 1047 { | |
| 1048 string[0] = CSI; | |
| 1049 string[1] = special_keys[i].code0; | |
| 1050 string[2] = special_keys[i].code1; | |
| 1051 len = -3; | |
| 1052 break; | |
| 1053 } | |
| 1054 } | |
| 1055 } | |
| 1056 | |
| 1057 if (len == 0) /* Unrecognized key */ | |
| 1058 return TRUE; | |
| 1059 | |
| 1060 /* Special keys (and a few others) may have modifiers. Also when using a | |
| 1061 * double-byte encoding (can't set the 8th bit). */ | |
| 1062 if (len == -3 || key_sym == GDK_space || key_sym == GDK_Tab | |
| 1063 || key_sym == GDK_Return || key_sym == GDK_Linefeed | |
| 1064 || key_sym == GDK_Escape || key_sym == GDK_KP_Tab | |
| 1065 || key_sym == GDK_ISO_Enter || key_sym == GDK_3270_Enter | |
|
2188
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1066 || (enc_dbcs && len == 1 && ((state & GDK_MOD1_MASK) |
|
2571
42bdbc2bbb59
Fix #ifdef for GDK_SUPER_MASK. (Stephan Schulz)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2550
diff
changeset
|
1067 #if GTK_CHECK_VERSION(2,10,0) |
|
2188
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1068 || (state & GDK_SUPER_MASK) |
| 7 | 1069 #endif |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
1070 ))) |
| 7 | 1071 { |
| 179 | 1072 modifiers = modifiers_gdk2vim(state); |
| 7 | 1073 |
| 1074 /* | |
| 1075 * For some keys a shift modifier is translated into another key | |
| 1076 * code. | |
| 1077 */ | |
| 1078 if (len == -3) | |
| 1079 key = TO_SPECIAL(string[1], string[2]); | |
| 1080 else | |
| 1081 key = string[0]; | |
| 1082 | |
| 1083 key = simplify_key(key, &modifiers); | |
| 1084 if (key == CSI) | |
| 1085 key = K_CSI; | |
| 1086 if (IS_SPECIAL(key)) | |
| 1087 { | |
| 1088 string[0] = CSI; | |
| 1089 string[1] = K_SECOND(key); | |
| 1090 string[2] = K_THIRD(key); | |
| 1091 len = 3; | |
| 1092 } | |
| 1093 else | |
| 1094 { | |
| 1095 string[0] = key; | |
| 1096 len = 1; | |
| 1097 } | |
| 1098 | |
| 1099 if (modifiers != 0) | |
| 1100 { | |
| 1101 string2[0] = CSI; | |
| 1102 string2[1] = KS_MODIFIER; | |
| 1103 string2[2] = modifiers; | |
| 1104 add_to_input_buf(string2, 3); | |
| 1105 } | |
| 1106 } | |
| 1107 | |
| 1108 if (len == 1 && ((string[0] == Ctrl_C && ctrl_c_interrupts) | |
| 1109 || (string[0] == intr_char && intr_char != Ctrl_C))) | |
| 1110 { | |
| 1111 trash_input_buf(); | |
| 1112 got_int = TRUE; | |
| 1113 } | |
| 1114 | |
| 1115 add_to_input_buf(string, len); | |
| 1116 | |
| 1117 /* blank out the pointer if necessary */ | |
| 1118 if (p_mh) | |
| 1119 gui_mch_mousehide(TRUE); | |
| 1120 | |
| 1121 return TRUE; | |
| 1122 } | |
| 1123 | |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
1124 #if defined(FEAT_XIM) |
| 7 | 1125 static gboolean |
| 1884 | 1126 key_release_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
| 1127 GdkEventKey *event, | |
| 1128 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
| 7 | 1129 { |
| 2923 | 1130 gui.event_time = event->time; |
| 7 | 1131 /* |
| 1132 * GTK+ 2 input methods may do fancy stuff on key release events too. | |
| 1133 * With the default IM for instance, you can enter any UCS code point | |
| 1134 * by holding down CTRL-SHIFT and typing hexadecimal digits. | |
| 1135 */ | |
| 1136 return xim_queue_key_press_event(event, FALSE); | |
| 1137 } | |
| 1138 #endif | |
| 1139 | |
| 1140 | |
| 1141 /**************************************************************************** | |
| 1142 * Selection handlers: | |
| 1143 */ | |
| 1144 | |
| 1145 static gint | |
| 1884 | 1146 selection_clear_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
| 7 | 1147 GdkEventSelection *event, |
| 1884 | 1148 gpointer user_data UNUSED) |
| 7 | 1149 { |
| 1150 if (event->selection == clip_plus.gtk_sel_atom) | |
| 1151 clip_lose_selection(&clip_plus); | |
| 1152 else | |
| 1153 clip_lose_selection(&clip_star); | |
| 1154 | |
| 1155 return TRUE; | |
| 1156 } | |
| 1157 | |
| 1158 #define RS_NONE 0 /* selection_received_cb() not called yet */ | |
| 1159 #define RS_OK 1 /* selection_received_cb() called and OK */ | |
| 1160 #define RS_FAIL 2 /* selection_received_cb() called and failed */ | |
| 1161 static int received_selection = RS_NONE; | |
| 1162 | |
| 1163 static void | |
| 1884 | 1164 selection_received_cb(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
| 7 | 1165 GtkSelectionData *data, |
| 1884 | 1166 guint time_ UNUSED, |
| 1167 gpointer user_data UNUSED) | |
| 7 | 1168 { |
| 1169 VimClipboard *cbd; | |
| 1170 char_u *text; | |
| 1171 char_u *tmpbuf = NULL; | |
| 1172 guchar *tmpbuf_utf8 = NULL; | |
| 1173 int len; | |
| 2896 | 1174 int motion_type = MAUTO; |
| 7 | 1175 |
| 1176 if (data->selection == clip_plus.gtk_sel_atom) | |
| 1177 cbd = &clip_plus; | |
| 1178 else | |
| 1179 cbd = &clip_star; | |
| 1180 | |
| 1181 text = (char_u *)data->data; | |
| 1182 len = data->length; | |
| 1183 | |
| 1184 if (text == NULL || len <= 0) | |
| 1185 { | |
| 1186 received_selection = RS_FAIL; | |
| 1187 /* clip_free_selection(cbd); ??? */ | |
| 1188 | |
| 1189 return; | |
| 1190 } | |
| 1191 | |
| 1192 if (data->type == vim_atom) | |
| 1193 { | |
| 1194 motion_type = *text++; | |
| 1195 --len; | |
| 1196 } | |
| 1197 | |
| 1198 else if (data->type == vimenc_atom) | |
| 1199 { | |
| 1200 char_u *enc; | |
| 1201 vimconv_T conv; | |
| 1202 | |
| 1203 motion_type = *text++; | |
| 1204 --len; | |
| 1205 | |
| 1206 enc = text; | |
| 1207 text += STRLEN(text) + 1; | |
| 1208 len -= text - enc; | |
| 1209 | |
| 1210 /* If the encoding of the text is different from 'encoding', attempt | |
| 1211 * converting it. */ | |
| 1212 conv.vc_type = CONV_NONE; | |
| 1213 convert_setup(&conv, enc, p_enc); | |
| 1214 if (conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
| 1215 { | |
| 1216 tmpbuf = string_convert(&conv, text, &len); | |
| 1217 if (tmpbuf != NULL) | |
| 1218 text = tmpbuf; | |
| 1219 convert_setup(&conv, NULL, NULL); | |
| 1220 } | |
| 1221 } | |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
1222 |
| 7 | 1223 /* gtk_selection_data_get_text() handles all the nasty details |
| 1224 * and targets and encodings etc. This rocks so hard. */ | |
| 1225 else | |
| 1226 { | |
| 1227 tmpbuf_utf8 = gtk_selection_data_get_text(data); | |
| 1228 if (tmpbuf_utf8 != NULL) | |
| 1229 { | |
| 1230 len = STRLEN(tmpbuf_utf8); | |
| 1231 if (input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
| 1232 { | |
| 1233 tmpbuf = string_convert(&input_conv, tmpbuf_utf8, &len); | |
| 1234 if (tmpbuf != NULL) | |
| 1235 text = tmpbuf; | |
| 1236 } | |
| 1237 else | |
| 1238 text = tmpbuf_utf8; | |
| 1239 } | |
| 1904 | 1240 else if (len >= 2 && text[0] == 0xff && text[1] == 0xfe) |
| 1241 { | |
| 1242 vimconv_T conv; | |
| 1243 | |
| 1244 /* UTF-16, we get this for HTML */ | |
| 1245 conv.vc_type = CONV_NONE; | |
| 1246 convert_setup_ext(&conv, (char_u *)"utf-16le", FALSE, p_enc, TRUE); | |
| 1247 | |
| 1248 if (conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
| 1249 { | |
| 1250 text += 2; | |
| 1251 len -= 2; | |
| 1252 tmpbuf = string_convert(&conv, text, &len); | |
| 1253 convert_setup(&conv, NULL, NULL); | |
| 1254 } | |
| 1255 if (tmpbuf != NULL) | |
| 1256 text = tmpbuf; | |
| 1257 } | |
| 7 | 1258 } |
| 1259 | |
| 2183 | 1260 /* Chop off any traiing NUL bytes. OpenOffice sends these. */ |
| 1261 while (len > 0 && text[len - 1] == NUL) | |
| 1262 --len; | |
| 1263 | |
| 7 | 1264 clip_yank_selection(motion_type, text, (long)len, cbd); |
| 1265 received_selection = RS_OK; | |
| 1266 vim_free(tmpbuf); | |
| 1267 g_free(tmpbuf_utf8); | |
| 1268 } | |
| 1269 | |
| 1270 /* | |
| 1271 * Prepare our selection data for passing it to the external selection | |
| 1272 * client. | |
| 1273 */ | |
| 1274 static void | |
| 1884 | 1275 selection_get_cb(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
| 7 | 1276 GtkSelectionData *selection_data, |
| 1277 guint info, | |
| 1884 | 1278 guint time_ UNUSED, |
| 1279 gpointer user_data UNUSED) | |
| 7 | 1280 { |
| 1281 char_u *string; | |
| 1282 char_u *tmpbuf; | |
| 1283 long_u tmplen; | |
| 1284 int length; | |
| 1285 int motion_type; | |
| 1286 GdkAtom type; | |
| 1287 VimClipboard *cbd; | |
| 1288 | |
| 1289 if (selection_data->selection == clip_plus.gtk_sel_atom) | |
| 1290 cbd = &clip_plus; | |
| 1291 else | |
| 1292 cbd = &clip_star; | |
| 1293 | |
| 1294 if (!cbd->owned) | |
| 1295 return; /* Shouldn't ever happen */ | |
| 1296 | |
| 1297 if (info != (guint)TARGET_STRING | |
| 1904 | 1298 && (!clip_html || info != (guint)TARGET_HTML) |
| 7 | 1299 && info != (guint)TARGET_UTF8_STRING |
| 1300 && info != (guint)TARGET_VIMENC | |
| 1301 && info != (guint)TARGET_VIM | |
| 1302 && info != (guint)TARGET_COMPOUND_TEXT | |
| 1303 && info != (guint)TARGET_TEXT) | |
| 1304 return; | |
| 1305 | |
| 1306 /* get the selection from the '*'/'+' register */ | |
| 1307 clip_get_selection(cbd); | |
| 1308 | |
| 1309 motion_type = clip_convert_selection(&string, &tmplen, cbd); | |
| 1310 if (motion_type < 0 || string == NULL) | |
| 1311 return; | |
| 1312 /* Due to int arguments we can't handle more than G_MAXINT. Also | |
| 1313 * reserve one extra byte for NUL or the motion type; just in case. | |
| 1314 * (Not that pasting 2G of text is ever going to work, but... ;-) */ | |
| 1315 length = MIN(tmplen, (long_u)(G_MAXINT - 1)); | |
| 1316 | |
| 1317 if (info == (guint)TARGET_VIM) | |
| 1318 { | |
| 1319 tmpbuf = alloc((unsigned)length + 1); | |
| 1320 if (tmpbuf != NULL) | |
| 1321 { | |
| 1322 tmpbuf[0] = motion_type; | |
| 1323 mch_memmove(tmpbuf + 1, string, (size_t)length); | |
| 1324 } | |
| 1325 /* For our own format, the first byte contains the motion type */ | |
| 1326 ++length; | |
| 1327 vim_free(string); | |
| 1328 string = tmpbuf; | |
| 1329 type = vim_atom; | |
| 1330 } | |
| 1331 | |
| 1904 | 1332 else if (info == (guint)TARGET_HTML) |
| 1333 { | |
| 1334 vimconv_T conv; | |
| 1335 | |
| 1336 /* Since we get utf-16, we probably should set it as well. */ | |
| 1337 conv.vc_type = CONV_NONE; | |
| 1338 convert_setup_ext(&conv, p_enc, TRUE, (char_u *)"utf-16le", FALSE); | |
| 1339 if (conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
| 1340 { | |
| 1341 tmpbuf = string_convert(&conv, string, &length); | |
| 1342 convert_setup(&conv, NULL, NULL); | |
| 1343 vim_free(string); | |
| 1344 string = tmpbuf; | |
| 1345 } | |
| 1346 | |
| 1347 /* Prepend the BOM: "fffe" */ | |
| 1348 if (string != NULL) | |
| 1349 { | |
| 1350 tmpbuf = alloc(length + 2); | |
| 1351 tmpbuf[0] = 0xff; | |
| 1352 tmpbuf[1] = 0xfe; | |
| 1353 mch_memmove(tmpbuf + 2, string, (size_t)length); | |
| 1354 vim_free(string); | |
| 1355 string = tmpbuf; | |
| 1356 length += 2; | |
| 1357 | |
| 1358 selection_data->type = selection_data->target; | |
| 1359 selection_data->format = 16; /* 16 bits per char */ | |
| 1360 gtk_selection_data_set(selection_data, html_atom, 16, | |
| 1361 string, length); | |
| 1362 vim_free(string); | |
| 1363 } | |
| 1364 return; | |
| 1365 } | |
| 7 | 1366 else if (info == (guint)TARGET_VIMENC) |
| 1367 { | |
| 1368 int l = STRLEN(p_enc); | |
| 1369 | |
| 1370 /* contents: motion_type 'encoding' NUL text */ | |
| 1371 tmpbuf = alloc((unsigned)length + l + 2); | |
| 1372 if (tmpbuf != NULL) | |
| 1373 { | |
| 1374 tmpbuf[0] = motion_type; | |
| 1375 STRCPY(tmpbuf + 1, p_enc); | |
| 1376 mch_memmove(tmpbuf + l + 2, string, (size_t)length); | |
| 1377 } | |
| 1378 length += l + 2; | |
| 1379 vim_free(string); | |
| 1380 string = tmpbuf; | |
| 1381 type = vimenc_atom; | |
| 1382 } | |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
1383 |
| 7 | 1384 /* gtk_selection_data_set_text() handles everything for us. This is |
| 1385 * so easy and simple and cool, it'd be insane not to use it. */ | |
| 1386 else | |
| 1387 { | |
| 1388 if (output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
| 1389 { | |
| 1390 tmpbuf = string_convert(&output_conv, string, &length); | |
| 1391 vim_free(string); | |
| 1392 if (tmpbuf == NULL) | |
| 1393 return; | |
| 1394 string = tmpbuf; | |
| 1395 } | |
| 1396 /* Validate the string to avoid runtime warnings */ | |
| 1397 if (g_utf8_validate((const char *)string, (gssize)length, NULL)) | |
| 1398 { | |
| 1399 gtk_selection_data_set_text(selection_data, | |
| 1400 (const char *)string, length); | |
| 1401 } | |
| 1402 vim_free(string); | |
| 1403 return; | |
| 1404 } | |
| 1405 | |
| 1406 if (string != NULL) | |
| 1407 { | |
| 1408 selection_data->type = selection_data->target; | |
| 1409 selection_data->format = 8; /* 8 bits per char */ | |
| 1410 | |
| 1411 gtk_selection_data_set(selection_data, type, 8, string, length); | |
| 1412 vim_free(string); | |
| 1413 } | |
| 1414 } | |
| 1415 | |
| 1416 /* | |
| 1417 * Check if the GUI can be started. Called before gvimrc is sourced. | |
| 1418 * Return OK or FAIL. | |
| 1419 */ | |
| 1420 int | |
| 1421 gui_mch_init_check(void) | |
| 1422 { | |
| 1423 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME | |
| 1424 if (gtk_socket_id == 0) | |
| 1425 using_gnome = 1; | |
| 1426 #endif | |
| 1427 | |
| 1428 /* Don't use gtk_init() or gnome_init(), it exits on failure. */ | |
| 1429 if (!gtk_init_check(&gui_argc, &gui_argv)) | |
| 1430 { | |
| 1431 gui.dying = TRUE; | |
| 1666 | 1432 EMSG(_((char *)e_opendisp)); |
| 7 | 1433 return FAIL; |
| 1434 } | |
| 1435 | |
| 1436 return OK; | |
| 1437 } | |
| 1438 | |
| 1439 | |
| 1440 /**************************************************************************** | |
| 1441 * Mouse handling callbacks | |
| 1442 */ | |
| 1443 | |
| 1444 | |
| 1445 static guint mouse_click_timer = 0; | |
| 1446 static int mouse_timed_out = TRUE; | |
| 1447 | |
| 1448 /* | |
| 1449 * Timer used to recognize multiple clicks of the mouse button | |
| 1450 */ | |
| 1451 static gint | |
| 1452 mouse_click_timer_cb(gpointer data) | |
| 1453 { | |
| 1454 /* we don't use this information currently */ | |
| 1455 int *timed_out = (int *) data; | |
| 1456 | |
| 1457 *timed_out = TRUE; | |
| 1458 return FALSE; /* don't happen again */ | |
| 1459 } | |
| 1460 | |
| 1461 static guint motion_repeat_timer = 0; | |
| 1462 static int motion_repeat_offset = FALSE; | |
| 1463 static gint motion_repeat_timer_cb(gpointer); | |
| 1464 | |
| 1465 static void | |
| 1466 process_motion_notify(int x, int y, GdkModifierType state) | |
| 1467 { | |
| 1468 int button; | |
| 1469 int_u vim_modifiers; | |
| 1470 | |
| 1471 button = (state & (GDK_BUTTON1_MASK | GDK_BUTTON2_MASK | | |
| 1472 GDK_BUTTON3_MASK | GDK_BUTTON4_MASK | | |
| 1473 GDK_BUTTON5_MASK)) | |
| 1474 ? MOUSE_DRAG : ' '; | |
| 1475 | |
| 1476 /* If our pointer is currently hidden, then we should show it. */ | |
| 1477 gui_mch_mousehide(FALSE); | |
| 1478 | |
| 1479 /* Just moving the rodent above the drawing area without any button | |
| 1480 * being pressed. */ | |
| 1481 if (button != MOUSE_DRAG) | |
| 1482 { | |
| 1483 gui_mouse_moved(x, y); | |
| 1484 return; | |
| 1485 } | |
| 1486 | |
| 1487 /* translate modifier coding between the main engine and GTK */ | |
| 179 | 1488 vim_modifiers = modifiers_gdk2mouse(state); |
| 7 | 1489 |
| 1226 | 1490 /* inform the editor engine about the occurrence of this event */ |
| 7 | 1491 gui_send_mouse_event(button, x, y, FALSE, vim_modifiers); |
| 1492 | |
| 1493 /* | |
| 1494 * Auto repeat timer handling. | |
| 1495 */ | |
| 1496 if (x < 0 || y < 0 | |
| 1497 || x >= gui.drawarea->allocation.width | |
| 1498 || y >= gui.drawarea->allocation.height) | |
| 1499 { | |
| 1500 | |
| 1501 int dx; | |
| 1502 int dy; | |
| 1503 int offshoot; | |
| 1504 int delay = 10; | |
| 1505 | |
| 1506 /* Calculate the maximal distance of the cursor from the drawing area. | |
| 1507 * (offshoot can't become negative here!). | |
| 1508 */ | |
| 1509 dx = x < 0 ? -x : x - gui.drawarea->allocation.width; | |
| 1510 dy = y < 0 ? -y : y - gui.drawarea->allocation.height; | |
| 1511 | |
| 1512 offshoot = dx > dy ? dx : dy; | |
| 1513 | |
| 1884 | 1514 /* Make a linearly decaying timer delay with a threshold of 5 at a |
| 7 | 1515 * distance of 127 pixels from the main window. |
| 1516 * | |
| 1517 * One could think endlessly about the most ergonomic variant here. | |
| 1518 * For example it could make sense to calculate the distance from the | |
| 1519 * drags start instead... | |
| 1520 * | |
| 1521 * Maybe a parabolic interpolation would suite us better here too... | |
| 1522 */ | |
| 1523 if (offshoot > 127) | |
| 1524 { | |
| 1525 /* 5 appears to be somehow near to my perceptual limits :-). */ | |
| 1526 delay = 5; | |
| 1527 } | |
| 1528 else | |
| 1529 { | |
| 1530 delay = (130 * (127 - offshoot)) / 127 + 5; | |
| 1531 } | |
| 1532 | |
| 1533 /* shoot again */ | |
| 1534 if (!motion_repeat_timer) | |
| 1535 motion_repeat_timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)delay, | |
| 1536 motion_repeat_timer_cb, NULL); | |
| 1537 } | |
| 1538 } | |
| 1539 | |
| 1540 /* | |
| 1541 * Timer used to recognize multiple clicks of the mouse button. | |
| 1542 */ | |
| 1543 static gint | |
| 1884 | 1544 motion_repeat_timer_cb(gpointer data UNUSED) |
| 7 | 1545 { |
| 1546 int x; | |
| 1547 int y; | |
| 1548 GdkModifierType state; | |
| 1549 | |
| 1550 gdk_window_get_pointer(gui.drawarea->window, &x, &y, &state); | |
| 1551 | |
| 1552 if (!(state & (GDK_BUTTON1_MASK | GDK_BUTTON2_MASK | | |
| 1553 GDK_BUTTON3_MASK | GDK_BUTTON4_MASK | | |
| 1554 GDK_BUTTON5_MASK))) | |
| 1555 { | |
| 1556 motion_repeat_timer = 0; | |
| 1557 return FALSE; | |
| 1558 } | |
| 1559 | |
| 1560 /* If there already is a mouse click in the input buffer, wait another | |
| 1561 * time (otherwise we would create a backlog of clicks) */ | |
| 1562 if (vim_used_in_input_buf() > 10) | |
| 1563 return TRUE; | |
| 1564 | |
| 1565 motion_repeat_timer = 0; | |
| 1566 | |
| 1567 /* | |
| 1568 * Fake a motion event. | |
| 1569 * Trick: Pretend the mouse moved to the next character on every other | |
| 1570 * event, otherwise drag events will be discarded, because they are still | |
| 1571 * in the same character. | |
| 1572 */ | |
| 1573 if (motion_repeat_offset) | |
| 1574 x += gui.char_width; | |
| 1575 | |
| 1576 motion_repeat_offset = !motion_repeat_offset; | |
| 1577 process_motion_notify(x, y, state); | |
| 1578 | |
| 1579 /* Don't happen again. We will get reinstalled in the synthetic event | |
| 1580 * if needed -- thus repeating should still work. */ | |
| 1581 return FALSE; | |
| 1582 } | |
| 1583 | |
| 1584 static gint | |
| 1884 | 1585 motion_notify_event(GtkWidget *widget, |
| 1586 GdkEventMotion *event, | |
| 1587 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
| 7 | 1588 { |
| 1589 if (event->is_hint) | |
| 1590 { | |
| 1591 int x; | |
| 1592 int y; | |
| 1593 GdkModifierType state; | |
| 1594 | |
| 1595 gdk_window_get_pointer(widget->window, &x, &y, &state); | |
| 1596 process_motion_notify(x, y, state); | |
| 1597 } | |
| 1598 else | |
| 1599 { | |
| 1600 process_motion_notify((int)event->x, (int)event->y, | |
| 1601 (GdkModifierType)event->state); | |
| 1602 } | |
| 1603 | |
| 1604 return TRUE; /* handled */ | |
| 1605 } | |
| 1606 | |
| 1607 | |
| 1608 /* | |
| 1609 * Mouse button handling. Note please that we are capturing multiple click's | |
| 1610 * by our own timeout mechanism instead of the one provided by GTK+ itself. | |
| 1611 * This is due to the way the generic VIM code is recognizing multiple clicks. | |
| 1612 */ | |
| 1613 static gint | |
| 1884 | 1614 button_press_event(GtkWidget *widget, |
| 1615 GdkEventButton *event, | |
| 1616 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
| 7 | 1617 { |
| 1618 int button; | |
| 1619 int repeated_click = FALSE; | |
| 1620 int x, y; | |
| 1621 int_u vim_modifiers; | |
| 1622 | |
| 2923 | 1623 gui.event_time = event->time; |
|
2270
917fff7bc09d
Fixes for time in clipboard request. Also fix ownership. (David Fries)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2254
diff
changeset
|
1624 |
| 7 | 1625 /* Make sure we have focus now we've been selected */ |
| 1626 if (gtk_socket_id != 0 && !GTK_WIDGET_HAS_FOCUS(widget)) | |
| 1627 gtk_widget_grab_focus(widget); | |
| 1628 | |
| 1629 /* | |
| 1630 * Don't let additional events about multiple clicks send by GTK to us | |
| 1631 * after the initial button press event confuse us. | |
| 1632 */ | |
| 1633 if (event->type != GDK_BUTTON_PRESS) | |
| 1634 return FALSE; | |
| 1635 | |
| 1636 x = event->x; | |
| 1637 y = event->y; | |
| 1638 | |
| 1639 /* Handle multiple clicks */ | |
| 1640 if (!mouse_timed_out && mouse_click_timer) | |
| 1641 { | |
| 1642 gtk_timeout_remove(mouse_click_timer); | |
| 1643 mouse_click_timer = 0; | |
| 1644 repeated_click = TRUE; | |
| 1645 } | |
| 1646 | |
| 1647 mouse_timed_out = FALSE; | |
| 1648 mouse_click_timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)p_mouset, | |
| 1649 mouse_click_timer_cb, &mouse_timed_out); | |
| 1650 | |
| 1651 switch (event->button) | |
| 1652 { | |
| 1653 case 1: | |
| 1654 button = MOUSE_LEFT; | |
| 1655 break; | |
| 1656 case 2: | |
| 1657 button = MOUSE_MIDDLE; | |
| 1658 break; | |
| 1659 case 3: | |
| 1660 button = MOUSE_RIGHT; | |
| 1661 break; | |
| 1662 default: | |
| 1663 return FALSE; /* Unknown button */ | |
| 1664 } | |
| 1665 | |
| 1666 #ifdef FEAT_XIM | |
| 1667 /* cancel any preediting */ | |
| 1668 if (im_is_preediting()) | |
| 1669 xim_reset(); | |
| 1670 #endif | |
| 1671 | |
| 179 | 1672 vim_modifiers = modifiers_gdk2mouse(event->state); |
| 7 | 1673 |
| 1674 gui_send_mouse_event(button, x, y, repeated_click, vim_modifiers); | |
| 1675 | |
| 1676 return TRUE; | |
| 1677 } | |
| 1678 | |
| 1679 /* | |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
1680 * GTK+ 2 abstracts scrolling via the GdkEventScroll. |
| 7 | 1681 */ |
| 1682 static gboolean | |
| 1884 | 1683 scroll_event(GtkWidget *widget, |
| 1684 GdkEventScroll *event, | |
| 1685 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
| 7 | 1686 { |
| 1687 int button; | |
| 179 | 1688 int_u vim_modifiers; |
| 7 | 1689 |
| 1690 if (gtk_socket_id != 0 && !GTK_WIDGET_HAS_FOCUS(widget)) | |
| 1691 gtk_widget_grab_focus(widget); | |
| 1692 | |
| 1693 switch (event->direction) | |
| 1694 { | |
| 1695 case GDK_SCROLL_UP: | |
| 1696 button = MOUSE_4; | |
| 1697 break; | |
| 1698 case GDK_SCROLL_DOWN: | |
| 1699 button = MOUSE_5; | |
| 1700 break; | |
|
2409
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2311
diff
changeset
|
1701 case GDK_SCROLL_LEFT: |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2311
diff
changeset
|
1702 button = MOUSE_7; |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2311
diff
changeset
|
1703 break; |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2311
diff
changeset
|
1704 case GDK_SCROLL_RIGHT: |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2311
diff
changeset
|
1705 button = MOUSE_6; |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2311
diff
changeset
|
1706 break; |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2311
diff
changeset
|
1707 default: /* This shouldn't happen */ |
| 7 | 1708 return FALSE; |
| 1709 } | |
| 1710 | |
| 1711 # ifdef FEAT_XIM | |
| 1712 /* cancel any preediting */ | |
| 1713 if (im_is_preediting()) | |
| 1714 xim_reset(); | |
| 1715 # endif | |
| 1716 | |
| 179 | 1717 vim_modifiers = modifiers_gdk2mouse(event->state); |
| 7 | 1718 |
| 1719 gui_send_mouse_event(button, (int)event->x, (int)event->y, | |
| 1720 FALSE, vim_modifiers); | |
| 1721 | |
| 1722 return TRUE; | |
| 1723 } | |
| 1724 | |
| 1725 | |
| 1726 static gint | |
| 1884 | 1727 button_release_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
| 1728 GdkEventButton *event, | |
| 1729 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
| 7 | 1730 { |
| 1731 int x, y; | |
| 1732 int_u vim_modifiers; | |
| 1733 | |
| 2923 | 1734 gui.event_time = event->time; |
|
2270
917fff7bc09d
Fixes for time in clipboard request. Also fix ownership. (David Fries)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2254
diff
changeset
|
1735 |
| 7 | 1736 /* Remove any motion "machine gun" timers used for automatic further |
| 1737 extension of allocation areas if outside of the applications window | |
| 1738 area .*/ | |
| 1739 if (motion_repeat_timer) | |
| 1740 { | |
| 1741 gtk_timeout_remove(motion_repeat_timer); | |
| 1742 motion_repeat_timer = 0; | |
| 1743 } | |
| 1744 | |
| 1745 x = event->x; | |
| 1746 y = event->y; | |
| 1747 | |
| 179 | 1748 vim_modifiers = modifiers_gdk2mouse(event->state); |
| 7 | 1749 |
| 1750 gui_send_mouse_event(MOUSE_RELEASE, x, y, FALSE, vim_modifiers); | |
| 1751 | |
| 1752 return TRUE; | |
| 1753 } | |
| 1754 | |
| 1755 | |
| 1756 #ifdef FEAT_DND | |
| 1757 /**************************************************************************** | |
| 1758 * Drag aNd Drop support handlers. | |
| 1759 */ | |
| 1760 | |
| 1761 /* | |
| 1762 * Count how many items there may be and separate them with a NUL. | |
| 1763 * Apparently the items are separated with \r\n. This is not documented, | |
| 1764 * thus be careful not to go past the end. Also allow separation with | |
| 1765 * NUL characters. | |
| 1766 */ | |
| 1767 static int | |
| 1768 count_and_decode_uri_list(char_u *out, char_u *raw, int len) | |
| 1769 { | |
| 1770 int i; | |
| 1771 char_u *p = out; | |
| 1772 int count = 0; | |
| 1773 | |
| 1774 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i) | |
| 1775 { | |
| 1776 if (raw[i] == NUL || raw[i] == '\n' || raw[i] == '\r') | |
| 1777 { | |
| 1778 if (p > out && p[-1] != NUL) | |
| 1779 { | |
| 1780 ++count; | |
| 1781 *p++ = NUL; | |
| 1782 } | |
| 1783 } | |
| 1784 else if (raw[i] == '%' && i + 2 < len && hexhex2nr(raw + i + 1) > 0) | |
| 1785 { | |
| 1786 *p++ = hexhex2nr(raw + i + 1); | |
| 1787 i += 2; | |
| 1788 } | |
| 1789 else | |
| 1790 *p++ = raw[i]; | |
| 1791 } | |
| 1792 if (p > out && p[-1] != NUL) | |
| 1793 { | |
| 1794 *p = NUL; /* last item didn't have \r or \n */ | |
| 1795 ++count; | |
| 1796 } | |
| 1797 return count; | |
| 1798 } | |
| 1799 | |
| 1800 /* | |
| 1801 * Parse NUL separated "src" strings. Make it an array "outlist" form. On | |
| 1802 * this process, URI which protocol is not "file:" are removed. Return | |
| 1803 * length of array (less than "max"). | |
| 1804 */ | |
| 1805 static int | |
| 1806 filter_uri_list(char_u **outlist, int max, char_u *src) | |
| 1807 { | |
| 1808 int i, j; | |
| 1809 | |
| 1810 for (i = j = 0; i < max; ++i) | |
| 1811 { | |
| 1812 outlist[i] = NULL; | |
| 1813 if (STRNCMP(src, "file:", 5) == 0) | |
| 1814 { | |
| 1815 src += 5; | |
| 1816 if (STRNCMP(src, "//localhost", 11) == 0) | |
| 1817 src += 11; | |
| 1818 while (src[0] == '/' && src[1] == '/') | |
| 1819 ++src; | |
| 1820 outlist[j++] = vim_strsave(src); | |
| 1821 } | |
| 1822 src += STRLEN(src) + 1; | |
| 1823 } | |
| 1824 return j; | |
| 1825 } | |
| 1826 | |
| 1827 static char_u ** | |
| 1828 parse_uri_list(int *count, char_u *data, int len) | |
| 1829 { | |
| 1830 int n = 0; | |
| 1831 char_u *tmp = NULL; | |
| 1832 char_u **array = NULL;; | |
| 1833 | |
| 1834 if (data != NULL && len > 0 && (tmp = (char_u *)alloc(len + 1)) != NULL) | |
| 1835 { | |
| 1836 n = count_and_decode_uri_list(tmp, data, len); | |
| 1837 if (n > 0 && (array = (char_u **)alloc(n * sizeof(char_u *))) != NULL) | |
| 1838 n = filter_uri_list(array, n, tmp); | |
| 1839 } | |
| 1840 vim_free(tmp); | |
| 1841 *count = n; | |
| 1842 return array; | |
| 1843 } | |
| 1844 | |
| 1845 static void | |
| 1846 drag_handle_uri_list(GdkDragContext *context, | |
| 1847 GtkSelectionData *data, | |
| 1848 guint time_, | |
| 1849 GdkModifierType state, | |
| 1850 gint x, | |
| 1851 gint y) | |
| 1852 { | |
| 1853 char_u **fnames; | |
| 1854 int nfiles = 0; | |
| 1855 | |
| 1856 fnames = parse_uri_list(&nfiles, data->data, data->length); | |
| 1857 | |
| 1858 if (fnames != NULL && nfiles > 0) | |
| 1859 { | |
| 179 | 1860 int_u modifiers; |
| 7 | 1861 |
| 1862 gtk_drag_finish(context, TRUE, FALSE, time_); /* accept */ | |
| 1863 | |
| 179 | 1864 modifiers = modifiers_gdk2mouse(state); |
| 7 | 1865 |
| 1866 gui_handle_drop(x, y, modifiers, fnames, nfiles); | |
| 1867 } | |
| 840 | 1868 else |
| 1869 vim_free(fnames); | |
| 7 | 1870 } |
| 1871 | |
| 1872 static void | |
| 1873 drag_handle_text(GdkDragContext *context, | |
| 1874 GtkSelectionData *data, | |
| 1875 guint time_, | |
| 1876 GdkModifierType state) | |
| 1877 { | |
| 1878 char_u dropkey[6] = {CSI, KS_MODIFIER, 0, CSI, KS_EXTRA, (char_u)KE_DROP}; | |
| 1879 char_u *text; | |
| 1880 int len; | |
| 1881 char_u *tmpbuf = NULL; | |
| 1882 | |
| 1883 text = data->data; | |
| 1884 len = data->length; | |
| 1885 | |
| 1886 if (data->type == utf8_string_atom) | |
| 1887 { | |
| 1888 if (input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
| 1889 tmpbuf = string_convert(&input_conv, text, &len); | |
| 1890 if (tmpbuf != NULL) | |
| 1891 text = tmpbuf; | |
| 1892 } | |
| 1893 | |
| 1894 dnd_yank_drag_data(text, (long)len); | |
| 1895 gtk_drag_finish(context, TRUE, FALSE, time_); /* accept */ | |
| 1896 vim_free(tmpbuf); | |
| 1897 | |
| 179 | 1898 dropkey[2] = modifiers_gdk2vim(state); |
| 7 | 1899 |
| 1900 if (dropkey[2] != 0) | |
| 1901 add_to_input_buf(dropkey, (int)sizeof(dropkey)); | |
| 1902 else | |
| 1903 add_to_input_buf(dropkey + 3, (int)(sizeof(dropkey) - 3)); | |
| 1904 } | |
| 1905 | |
| 1906 /* | |
| 1907 * DND receiver. | |
| 1908 */ | |
| 1909 static void | |
| 1910 drag_data_received_cb(GtkWidget *widget, | |
| 1911 GdkDragContext *context, | |
| 1912 gint x, | |
| 1913 gint y, | |
| 1914 GtkSelectionData *data, | |
| 1915 guint info, | |
| 1916 guint time_, | |
| 1884 | 1917 gpointer user_data UNUSED) |
| 7 | 1918 { |
| 1919 GdkModifierType state; | |
| 1920 | |
| 1921 /* Guard against trash */ | |
| 1922 if (data->data == NULL | |
| 1923 || data->length <= 0 | |
| 1924 || data->format != 8 | |
| 1925 || data->data[data->length] != '\0') | |
| 1926 { | |
| 1927 gtk_drag_finish(context, FALSE, FALSE, time_); | |
| 1928 return; | |
| 1929 } | |
| 1930 | |
| 1931 /* Get the current modifier state for proper distinguishment between | |
| 1932 * different operations later. */ | |
| 1933 gdk_window_get_pointer(widget->window, NULL, NULL, &state); | |
| 1934 | |
| 1935 /* Not sure about the role of "text/plain" here... */ | |
| 1936 if (info == (guint)TARGET_TEXT_URI_LIST) | |
| 1937 drag_handle_uri_list(context, data, time_, state, x, y); | |
| 1938 else | |
| 1939 drag_handle_text(context, data, time_, state); | |
| 1940 | |
| 1941 } | |
| 1942 #endif /* FEAT_DND */ | |
| 1943 | |
| 1944 | |
| 1945 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION) | |
| 1946 /* | |
| 1947 * GnomeClient interact callback. Check for unsaved buffers that cannot | |
| 1948 * be abandoned and pop up a dialog asking the user for confirmation if | |
| 1949 * necessary. | |
| 1950 */ | |
| 1951 static void | |
|
2188
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1952 sm_client_check_changed_any(GnomeClient *client UNUSED, |
| 7 | 1953 gint key, |
|
2188
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1954 GnomeDialogType type UNUSED, |
|
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1955 gpointer data UNUSED) |
| 7 | 1956 { |
| 1957 cmdmod_T save_cmdmod; | |
| 1958 gboolean shutdown_cancelled; | |
| 1959 | |
| 1960 save_cmdmod = cmdmod; | |
| 1961 | |
| 1962 # ifdef FEAT_BROWSE | |
| 1963 cmdmod.browse = TRUE; | |
| 1964 # endif | |
| 1965 # if defined(FEAT_GUI_DIALOG) || defined(FEAT_CON_DIALOG) | |
| 1966 cmdmod.confirm = TRUE; | |
| 1967 # endif | |
| 1968 /* | |
| 1969 * If there are changed buffers, present the user with | |
| 1970 * a dialog if possible, otherwise give an error message. | |
| 1971 */ | |
| 1972 shutdown_cancelled = check_changed_any(FALSE); | |
| 1973 | |
| 1974 exiting = FALSE; | |
| 1975 cmdmod = save_cmdmod; | |
| 1976 setcursor(); /* position the cursor */ | |
| 1977 out_flush(); | |
| 1978 /* | |
| 1979 * If the user hit the [Cancel] button the whole shutdown | |
| 1980 * will be cancelled. Wow, quite powerful feature (: | |
| 1981 */ | |
| 1982 gnome_interaction_key_return(key, shutdown_cancelled); | |
| 1983 } | |
| 1984 | |
| 1985 /* | |
| 1986 * Generate a script that can be used to restore the current editing session. | |
| 1987 * Save the value of v:this_session before running :mksession in order to make | |
| 1988 * automagic session save fully transparent. Return TRUE on success. | |
| 1989 */ | |
| 1990 static int | |
| 1991 write_session_file(char_u *filename) | |
| 1992 { | |
| 1993 char_u *escaped_filename; | |
| 1994 char *mksession_cmdline; | |
| 1995 unsigned int save_ssop_flags; | |
| 1996 int failed; | |
| 1997 | |
| 1998 /* | |
| 1999 * Build an ex command line to create a script that restores the current | |
| 2000 * session if executed. Escape the filename to avoid nasty surprises. | |
| 2001 */ | |
| 2002 escaped_filename = vim_strsave_escaped(filename, escape_chars); | |
| 2003 if (escaped_filename == NULL) | |
| 2004 return FALSE; | |
| 1296 | 2005 mksession_cmdline = g_strconcat("mksession ", (char *)escaped_filename, |
| 2006 NULL); | |
| 7 | 2007 vim_free(escaped_filename); |
| 1296 | 2008 |
| 7 | 2009 /* |
| 2010 * Use a reasonable hardcoded set of 'sessionoptions' flags to avoid | |
| 2011 * unpredictable effects when the session is saved automatically. Also, | |
| 2012 * we definitely need SSOP_GLOBALS to be able to restore v:this_session. | |
| 2013 * Don't use SSOP_BUFFERS to prevent the buffer list from becoming | |
| 2014 * enormously large if the GNOME session feature is used regularly. | |
| 2015 */ | |
| 2016 save_ssop_flags = ssop_flags; | |
| 2017 ssop_flags = (SSOP_BLANK|SSOP_CURDIR|SSOP_FOLDS|SSOP_GLOBALS | |
| 1296 | 2018 |SSOP_HELP|SSOP_OPTIONS|SSOP_WINSIZE|SSOP_TABPAGES); |
| 7 | 2019 |
| 2020 do_cmdline_cmd((char_u *)"let Save_VV_this_session = v:this_session"); | |
| 2021 failed = (do_cmdline_cmd((char_u *)mksession_cmdline) == FAIL); | |
| 2022 do_cmdline_cmd((char_u *)"let v:this_session = Save_VV_this_session"); | |
| 150 | 2023 do_unlet((char_u *)"Save_VV_this_session", TRUE); |
| 7 | 2024 |
| 2025 ssop_flags = save_ssop_flags; | |
| 2026 g_free(mksession_cmdline); | |
| 2027 /* | |
| 2028 * Reopen the file and append a command to restore v:this_session, | |
| 2029 * as if this save never happened. This is to avoid conflicts with | |
| 2030 * the user's own sessions. FIXME: It's probably less hackish to add | |
| 2031 * a "stealth" flag to 'sessionoptions' -- gotta ask Bram. | |
| 2032 */ | |
| 2033 if (!failed) | |
| 2034 { | |
| 2035 FILE *fd; | |
| 2036 | |
| 2037 fd = open_exfile(filename, TRUE, APPENDBIN); | |
| 2038 | |
| 2039 failed = (fd == NULL | |
| 2040 || put_line(fd, "let v:this_session = Save_VV_this_session") == FAIL | |
| 2041 || put_line(fd, "unlet Save_VV_this_session") == FAIL); | |
| 2042 | |
| 2043 if (fd != NULL && fclose(fd) != 0) | |
| 2044 failed = TRUE; | |
| 2045 | |
| 2046 if (failed) | |
| 2047 mch_remove(filename); | |
| 2048 } | |
| 2049 | |
| 2050 return !failed; | |
| 2051 } | |
| 2052 | |
| 2053 /* | |
| 2054 * "save_yourself" signal handler. Initiate an interaction to ask the user | |
| 2055 * for confirmation if necessary. Save the current editing session and tell | |
| 2056 * the session manager how to restart Vim. | |
| 2057 */ | |
| 2058 static gboolean | |
| 2059 sm_client_save_yourself(GnomeClient *client, | |
|
2188
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2060 gint phase UNUSED, |
|
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2061 GnomeSaveStyle save_style UNUSED, |
|
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2062 gboolean shutdown UNUSED, |
| 7 | 2063 GnomeInteractStyle interact_style, |
|
2188
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2064 gboolean fast UNUSED, |
|
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2065 gpointer data UNUSED) |
| 7 | 2066 { |
| 2067 static const char suffix[] = "-session.vim"; | |
| 2068 char *session_file; | |
| 2069 unsigned int len; | |
| 2070 gboolean success; | |
| 2071 | |
| 2072 /* Always request an interaction if possible. check_changed_any() | |
| 2073 * won't actually show a dialog unless any buffers have been modified. | |
| 2074 * There doesn't seem to be an obvious way to check that without | |
| 2075 * automatically firing the dialog. Anyway, it works just fine. */ | |
| 2076 if (interact_style == GNOME_INTERACT_ANY) | |
| 2077 gnome_client_request_interaction(client, GNOME_DIALOG_NORMAL, | |
| 2078 &sm_client_check_changed_any, | |
| 2079 NULL); | |
| 2080 out_flush(); | |
| 2081 ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE); /* preserve all swap files */ | |
| 2082 | |
| 2083 /* The path is unique for each session save. We do neither know nor care | |
| 2084 * which session script will actually be used later. This decision is in | |
| 2085 * the domain of the session manager. */ | |
| 2086 session_file = gnome_config_get_real_path( | |
| 2087 gnome_client_get_config_prefix(client)); | |
| 2088 len = strlen(session_file); | |
| 2089 | |
| 2090 if (len > 0 && session_file[len-1] == G_DIR_SEPARATOR) | |
| 2091 --len; /* get rid of the superfluous trailing '/' */ | |
| 2092 | |
| 2093 session_file = g_renew(char, session_file, len + sizeof(suffix)); | |
| 2094 memcpy(session_file + len, suffix, sizeof(suffix)); | |
| 2095 | |
| 2096 success = write_session_file((char_u *)session_file); | |
| 2097 | |
| 2098 if (success) | |
| 2099 { | |
| 2100 const char *argv[8]; | |
| 2101 int i; | |
| 2102 | |
| 2103 /* Tell the session manager how to wipe out the stored session data. | |
| 2104 * This isn't as dangerous as it looks, don't worry :) session_file | |
| 2105 * is a unique absolute filename. Usually it'll be something like | |
| 2106 * `/home/user/.gnome2/vim-XXXXXX-session.vim'. */ | |
| 2107 i = 0; | |
| 2108 argv[i++] = "rm"; | |
| 2109 argv[i++] = session_file; | |
| 2110 argv[i] = NULL; | |
| 2111 | |
| 2112 gnome_client_set_discard_command(client, i, (char **)argv); | |
| 2113 | |
| 2114 /* Tell the session manager how to restore the just saved session. | |
| 2115 * This is easily done thanks to Vim's -S option. Pass the -f flag | |
| 2116 * since there's no need to fork -- it might even cause confusion. | |
| 2117 * Also pass the window role to give the WM something to match on. | |
| 2118 * The role is set in gui_mch_open(), thus should _never_ be NULL. */ | |
| 2119 i = 0; | |
| 2120 argv[i++] = restart_command; | |
| 2121 argv[i++] = "-f"; | |
| 2122 argv[i++] = "-g"; | |
| 2123 argv[i++] = "--role"; | |
| 2124 argv[i++] = gtk_window_get_role(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin)); | |
| 2125 argv[i++] = "-S"; | |
| 2126 argv[i++] = session_file; | |
| 2127 argv[i] = NULL; | |
| 2128 | |
| 2129 gnome_client_set_restart_command(client, i, (char **)argv); | |
| 2130 gnome_client_set_clone_command(client, 0, NULL); | |
| 2131 } | |
| 2132 | |
| 2133 g_free(session_file); | |
| 2134 | |
| 2135 return success; | |
| 2136 } | |
| 2137 | |
| 2138 /* | |
| 2139 * Called when the session manager wants us to die. There isn't much to save | |
| 2140 * here since "save_yourself" has been emitted before (unless serious trouble | |
| 2141 * is happening). | |
| 2142 */ | |
| 2143 static void | |
|
2188
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2144 sm_client_die(GnomeClient *client UNUSED, gpointer data UNUSED) |
| 7 | 2145 { |
| 2146 /* Don't write messages to the GUI anymore */ | |
| 2147 full_screen = FALSE; | |
| 2148 | |
| 1666 | 2149 vim_strncpy(IObuff, (char_u *) |
| 419 | 2150 _("Vim: Received \"die\" request from session manager\n"), |
| 1666 | 2151 IOSIZE - 1); |
| 7 | 2152 preserve_exit(); |
| 2153 } | |
| 2154 | |
| 2155 /* | |
| 2156 * Connect our signal handlers to be notified on session save and shutdown. | |
| 2157 */ | |
| 2158 static void | |
| 2159 setup_save_yourself(void) | |
| 2160 { | |
| 2161 GnomeClient *client; | |
| 2162 | |
| 2163 client = gnome_master_client(); | |
| 2164 | |
| 2165 if (client != NULL) | |
| 2166 { | |
| 2167 /* Must use the deprecated gtk_signal_connect() for compatibility | |
| 2168 * with GNOME 1. Arrgh, zombies! */ | |
| 2169 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(client), "save_yourself", | |
| 2170 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(&sm_client_save_yourself), NULL); | |
| 2171 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(client), "die", | |
| 2172 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(&sm_client_die), NULL); | |
| 2173 } | |
| 2174 } | |
| 2175 | |
| 2176 #else /* !(FEAT_GUI_GNOME && FEAT_SESSION) */ | |
| 2177 | |
| 2178 # ifdef USE_XSMP | |
| 2179 /* | |
| 2180 * GTK tells us that XSMP needs attention | |
| 2181 */ | |
| 2182 static gboolean | |
| 2183 local_xsmp_handle_requests(source, condition, data) | |
| 1884 | 2184 GIOChannel *source UNUSED; |
| 7 | 2185 GIOCondition condition; |
| 2186 gpointer data; | |
| 2187 { | |
| 2188 if (condition == G_IO_IN) | |
| 2189 { | |
| 2190 /* Do stuff; maybe close connection */ | |
| 2191 if (xsmp_handle_requests() == FAIL) | |
| 2192 g_io_channel_unref((GIOChannel *)data); | |
| 2193 return TRUE; | |
| 2194 } | |
| 2195 /* Error */ | |
| 2196 g_io_channel_unref((GIOChannel *)data); | |
| 2197 xsmp_close(); | |
| 2198 return TRUE; | |
| 2199 } | |
| 2200 # endif /* USE_XSMP */ | |
| 2201 | |
| 2202 /* | |
| 2203 * Setup the WM_PROTOCOLS to indicate we want the WM_SAVE_YOURSELF event. | |
| 2204 * This is an ugly use of X functions. GTK doesn't offer an alternative. | |
| 2205 */ | |
| 2206 static void | |
| 2207 setup_save_yourself(void) | |
| 2208 { | |
| 2209 Atom *existing_atoms = NULL; | |
| 2210 int count = 0; | |
| 2211 | |
| 2212 #ifdef USE_XSMP | |
| 2213 if (xsmp_icefd != -1) | |
| 2214 { | |
| 2215 /* | |
| 2216 * Use XSMP is preference to legacy WM_SAVE_YOURSELF; | |
| 2217 * set up GTK IO monitor | |
| 2218 */ | |
| 2219 GIOChannel *g_io = g_io_channel_unix_new(xsmp_icefd); | |
| 2220 | |
| 2221 g_io_add_watch(g_io, G_IO_IN | G_IO_ERR | G_IO_HUP, | |
| 2222 local_xsmp_handle_requests, (gpointer)g_io); | |
| 2223 } | |
| 2224 else | |
| 2225 #endif | |
| 2226 { | |
| 2227 /* Fall back to old method */ | |
| 2228 | |
| 2229 /* first get the existing value */ | |
| 2230 if (XGetWMProtocols(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window), | |
| 2231 GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window), | |
| 2232 &existing_atoms, &count)) | |
| 2233 { | |
| 2234 Atom *new_atoms; | |
| 2235 Atom save_yourself_xatom; | |
| 2236 int i; | |
| 2237 | |
| 2238 save_yourself_xatom = GET_X_ATOM(save_yourself_atom); | |
| 2239 | |
| 2240 /* check if WM_SAVE_YOURSELF isn't there yet */ | |
| 2241 for (i = 0; i < count; ++i) | |
| 2242 if (existing_atoms[i] == save_yourself_xatom) | |
| 2243 break; | |
| 2244 | |
| 2245 if (i == count) | |
| 2246 { | |
| 2247 /* allocate an Atoms array which is one item longer */ | |
| 2248 new_atoms = (Atom *)alloc((unsigned)((count + 1) | |
| 2249 * sizeof(Atom))); | |
| 2250 if (new_atoms != NULL) | |
| 2251 { | |
| 2252 memcpy(new_atoms, existing_atoms, count * sizeof(Atom)); | |
| 2253 new_atoms[count] = save_yourself_xatom; | |
| 2254 XSetWMProtocols(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window), | |
| 2255 GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window), | |
| 2256 new_atoms, count + 1); | |
| 2257 vim_free(new_atoms); | |
| 2258 } | |
| 2259 } | |
| 2260 XFree(existing_atoms); | |
| 2261 } | |
| 2262 } | |
| 2263 } | |
| 2264 | |
| 2265 /* | |
| 2266 * Installing a global event filter seems to be the only way to catch | |
| 2267 * client messages of type WM_PROTOCOLS without overriding GDK's own | |
| 2268 * client message event filter. Well, that's still better than trying | |
| 2269 * to guess what the GDK filter had done if it had been invoked instead | |
| 2270 * | |
| 2271 * GTK2_FIXME: This doesn't seem to work. For some reason we never | |
| 2272 * receive WM_SAVE_YOURSELF even though everything is set up correctly. | |
| 2273 * I have the nasty feeling modern session managers just don't send this | |
| 2274 * deprecated message anymore. Addition: confirmed by several people. | |
| 2275 * | |
| 2276 * The GNOME session support is much cooler anyway. Unlike this ugly | |
| 2277 * WM_SAVE_YOURSELF hack it actually stores the session... And yes, | |
| 2278 * it should work with KDE as well. | |
| 2279 */ | |
| 2280 static GdkFilterReturn | |
| 1884 | 2281 global_event_filter(GdkXEvent *xev, |
| 2282 GdkEvent *event UNUSED, | |
| 2283 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
| 7 | 2284 { |
| 2285 XEvent *xevent = (XEvent *)xev; | |
| 2286 | |
| 2287 if (xevent != NULL | |
| 2288 && xevent->type == ClientMessage | |
| 2289 && xevent->xclient.message_type == GET_X_ATOM(wm_protocols_atom) | |
| 1884 | 2290 && (long_u)xevent->xclient.data.l[0] |
| 2291 == GET_X_ATOM(save_yourself_atom)) | |
| 7 | 2292 { |
| 2293 out_flush(); | |
| 2294 ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE); /* preserve all swap files */ | |
| 2295 /* | |
| 2296 * Set the window's WM_COMMAND property, to let the window manager | |
| 2297 * know we are done saving ourselves. We don't want to be | |
| 2298 * restarted, thus set argv to NULL. | |
| 2299 */ | |
| 2300 XSetCommand(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window), | |
| 2301 GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window), | |
| 2302 NULL, 0); | |
| 2303 return GDK_FILTER_REMOVE; | |
| 2304 } | |
| 2305 | |
| 2306 return GDK_FILTER_CONTINUE; | |
| 2307 } | |
| 2308 #endif /* !(FEAT_GUI_GNOME && FEAT_SESSION) */ | |
| 2309 | |
| 2310 | |
| 2311 /* | |
| 2312 * Setup the window icon & xcmdsrv comm after the main window has been realized. | |
| 2313 */ | |
| 2314 static void | |
| 1884 | 2315 mainwin_realize(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, gpointer data UNUSED) |
| 7 | 2316 { |
| 2317 /* If you get an error message here, you still need to unpack the runtime | |
| 2318 * archive! */ | |
| 2319 #ifdef magick | |
| 2320 # undef magick | |
| 2321 #endif | |
| 2322 /* A bit hackish, but avoids casting later and allows optimization */ | |
| 2323 # define static static const | |
| 2324 #define magick vim32x32 | |
| 2325 #include "../runtime/vim32x32.xpm" | |
| 2326 #undef magick | |
| 2327 #define magick vim16x16 | |
| 2328 #include "../runtime/vim16x16.xpm" | |
| 2329 #undef magick | |
| 2330 #define magick vim48x48 | |
| 2331 #include "../runtime/vim48x48.xpm" | |
| 2332 #undef magick | |
| 2333 # undef static | |
| 2334 | |
| 2335 /* When started with "--echo-wid" argument, write window ID on stdout. */ | |
| 2336 if (echo_wid_arg) | |
| 2337 { | |
| 2338 printf("WID: %ld\n", (long)GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window)); | |
| 2339 fflush(stdout); | |
| 2340 } | |
| 2341 | |
| 2342 if (vim_strchr(p_go, GO_ICON) != NULL) | |
| 2343 { | |
| 2344 /* | |
| 2345 * Add an icon to the main window. For fun and convenience of the user. | |
| 2346 */ | |
| 2347 GList *icons = NULL; | |
| 2348 | |
| 2349 icons = g_list_prepend(icons, gdk_pixbuf_new_from_xpm_data(vim16x16)); | |
| 2350 icons = g_list_prepend(icons, gdk_pixbuf_new_from_xpm_data(vim32x32)); | |
| 2351 icons = g_list_prepend(icons, gdk_pixbuf_new_from_xpm_data(vim48x48)); | |
| 2352 | |
| 2353 gtk_window_set_icon_list(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), icons); | |
| 2354 | |
| 2355 g_list_foreach(icons, (GFunc)&g_object_unref, NULL); | |
| 2356 g_list_free(icons); | |
| 2357 } | |
| 2358 | |
| 2359 #if !(defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION)) | |
| 2360 /* Register a handler for WM_SAVE_YOURSELF with GDK's low-level X I/F */ | |
| 2361 gdk_window_add_filter(NULL, &global_event_filter, NULL); | |
| 2362 #endif | |
| 2363 /* Setup to indicate to the window manager that we want to catch the | |
| 2364 * WM_SAVE_YOURSELF event. For GNOME, this connects to the session | |
| 2365 * manager instead. */ | |
| 2366 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION) | |
| 2367 if (using_gnome) | |
| 2368 #endif | |
| 2369 setup_save_yourself(); | |
| 2370 | |
| 2371 #ifdef FEAT_CLIENTSERVER | |
| 2372 if (serverName == NULL && serverDelayedStartName != NULL) | |
| 2373 { | |
| 2374 /* This is a :gui command in a plain vim with no previous server */ | |
| 2375 commWindow = GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window); | |
| 2376 | |
| 2377 (void)serverRegisterName(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window), | |
| 2378 serverDelayedStartName); | |
| 2379 } | |
| 2380 else | |
| 2381 { | |
| 2382 /* | |
| 2383 * Cannot handle "XLib-only" windows with gtk event routines, we'll | |
| 2384 * have to change the "server" registration to that of the main window | |
| 2385 * If we have not registered a name yet, remember the window | |
| 2386 */ | |
| 2387 serverChangeRegisteredWindow(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window), | |
| 2388 GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window)); | |
| 2389 } | |
| 2390 gtk_widget_add_events(gui.mainwin, GDK_PROPERTY_CHANGE_MASK); | |
| 2391 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "property_notify_event", | |
| 2392 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(property_event), NULL); | |
| 2393 #endif | |
| 2394 } | |
| 2395 | |
| 2396 static GdkCursor * | |
| 2397 create_blank_pointer(void) | |
| 2398 { | |
| 2399 GdkWindow *root_window = NULL; | |
| 2400 GdkPixmap *blank_mask; | |
| 2401 GdkCursor *cursor; | |
| 2402 GdkColor color = { 0, 0, 0, 0 }; | |
| 2403 char blank_data[] = { 0x0 }; | |
| 2404 | |
| 2405 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD | |
| 2406 root_window = gtk_widget_get_root_window(gui.mainwin); | |
| 2407 #endif | |
| 2408 | |
| 2409 /* Create a pseudo blank pointer, which is in fact one pixel by one pixel | |
| 2410 * in size. */ | |
| 2411 blank_mask = gdk_bitmap_create_from_data(root_window, blank_data, 1, 1); | |
| 2412 cursor = gdk_cursor_new_from_pixmap(blank_mask, blank_mask, | |
| 2413 &color, &color, 0, 0); | |
| 2414 gdk_bitmap_unref(blank_mask); | |
| 2415 | |
| 2416 return cursor; | |
| 2417 } | |
| 2418 | |
| 2419 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD | |
| 2420 static void | |
| 2421 mainwin_screen_changed_cb(GtkWidget *widget, | |
| 1884 | 2422 GdkScreen *previous_screen UNUSED, |
| 2423 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
| 7 | 2424 { |
| 2425 if (!gtk_widget_has_screen(widget)) | |
| 2426 return; | |
| 2427 | |
| 2428 /* | |
| 1226 | 2429 * Recreate the invisible mouse cursor. |
| 7 | 2430 */ |
| 2431 if (gui.blank_pointer != NULL) | |
| 2432 gdk_cursor_unref(gui.blank_pointer); | |
| 2433 | |
| 2434 gui.blank_pointer = create_blank_pointer(); | |
| 2435 | |
| 2436 if (gui.pointer_hidden && gui.drawarea->window != NULL) | |
| 2437 gdk_window_set_cursor(gui.drawarea->window, gui.blank_pointer); | |
| 2438 | |
| 2439 /* | |
| 2440 * Create a new PangoContext for this screen, and initialize it | |
| 2441 * with the current font if necessary. | |
| 2442 */ | |
| 2443 if (gui.text_context != NULL) | |
| 2444 g_object_unref(gui.text_context); | |
| 2445 | |
| 2446 gui.text_context = gtk_widget_create_pango_context(widget); | |
| 2447 pango_context_set_base_dir(gui.text_context, PANGO_DIRECTION_LTR); | |
| 2448 | |
| 2449 if (gui.norm_font != NULL) | |
| 2450 { | |
| 38 | 2451 gui_mch_init_font(p_guifont, FALSE); |
| 814 | 2452 gui_set_shellsize(FALSE, FALSE, RESIZE_BOTH); |
| 7 | 2453 } |
| 2454 } | |
| 2455 #endif /* HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD */ | |
| 2456 | |
| 2457 /* | |
| 2458 * After the drawing area comes up, we calculate all colors and create the | |
| 2459 * dummy blank cursor. | |
| 2460 * | |
| 2461 * Don't try to set any VIM scrollbar sizes anywhere here. I'm relying on the | |
| 2462 * fact that the main VIM engine doesn't take them into account anywhere. | |
| 2463 */ | |
| 2464 static void | |
| 1884 | 2465 drawarea_realize_cb(GtkWidget *widget, gpointer data UNUSED) |
| 7 | 2466 { |
| 2467 GtkWidget *sbar; | |
| 2468 | |
| 2469 #ifdef FEAT_XIM | |
| 2470 xim_init(); | |
| 2471 #endif | |
| 2472 gui_mch_new_colors(); | |
| 2473 gui.text_gc = gdk_gc_new(gui.drawarea->window); | |
| 2474 | |
| 2475 gui.blank_pointer = create_blank_pointer(); | |
| 2476 if (gui.pointer_hidden) | |
| 2477 gdk_window_set_cursor(widget->window, gui.blank_pointer); | |
| 2478 | |
| 2479 /* get the actual size of the scrollbars, if they are realized */ | |
| 2480 sbar = firstwin->w_scrollbars[SBAR_LEFT].id; | |
| 2481 if (!sbar || (!gui.which_scrollbars[SBAR_LEFT] | |
| 2482 && firstwin->w_scrollbars[SBAR_RIGHT].id)) | |
| 2483 sbar = firstwin->w_scrollbars[SBAR_RIGHT].id; | |
| 2484 if (sbar && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(sbar) && sbar->allocation.width) | |
| 2485 gui.scrollbar_width = sbar->allocation.width; | |
| 2486 | |
| 2487 sbar = gui.bottom_sbar.id; | |
| 2488 if (sbar && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(sbar) && sbar->allocation.height) | |
| 2489 gui.scrollbar_height = sbar->allocation.height; | |
| 2490 } | |
| 2491 | |
| 2492 /* | |
| 2493 * Properly clean up on shutdown. | |
| 2494 */ | |
| 2495 static void | |
| 1884 | 2496 drawarea_unrealize_cb(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, gpointer data UNUSED) |
| 7 | 2497 { |
| 2498 /* Don't write messages to the GUI anymore */ | |
| 2499 full_screen = FALSE; | |
| 2500 | |
| 2501 #ifdef FEAT_XIM | |
| 2502 im_shutdown(); | |
| 2503 #endif | |
| 2504 if (gui.ascii_glyphs != NULL) | |
| 2505 { | |
| 2506 pango_glyph_string_free(gui.ascii_glyphs); | |
| 2507 gui.ascii_glyphs = NULL; | |
| 2508 } | |
| 2509 if (gui.ascii_font != NULL) | |
| 2510 { | |
| 2511 g_object_unref(gui.ascii_font); | |
| 2512 gui.ascii_font = NULL; | |
| 2513 } | |
| 2514 g_object_unref(gui.text_context); | |
| 2515 gui.text_context = NULL; | |
| 2516 | |
| 2517 g_object_unref(gui.text_gc); | |
| 2518 gui.text_gc = NULL; | |
| 2519 | |
| 2520 gdk_cursor_unref(gui.blank_pointer); | |
| 2521 gui.blank_pointer = NULL; | |
| 2522 } | |
| 2523 | |
| 2524 static void | |
| 1884 | 2525 drawarea_style_set_cb(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
| 2526 GtkStyle *previous_style UNUSED, | |
| 2527 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
| 7 | 2528 { |
| 2529 gui_mch_new_colors(); | |
| 2530 } | |
| 2531 | |
| 2532 /* | |
| 2533 * Callback routine for the "delete_event" signal on the toplevel window. | |
| 2534 * Tries to vim gracefully, or refuses to exit with changed buffers. | |
| 2535 */ | |
| 2536 static gint | |
| 1884 | 2537 delete_event_cb(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
| 2538 GdkEventAny *event UNUSED, | |
| 2539 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
| 7 | 2540 { |
| 2541 gui_shell_closed(); | |
| 2542 return TRUE; | |
| 2543 } | |
| 2544 | |
| 685 | 2545 #if defined(FEAT_MENU) || defined(FEAT_TOOLBAR) || defined(FEAT_GUI_TABLINE) |
| 2546 static int | |
| 2547 get_item_dimensions(GtkWidget *widget, GtkOrientation orientation) | |
| 2548 { | |
| 2549 GtkOrientation item_orientation = GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL; | |
| 2550 | |
| 2551 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME | |
| 2552 if (using_gnome && widget != NULL) | |
| 2553 { | |
| 856 | 2554 GtkWidget *parent; |
| 685 | 2555 BonoboDockItem *dockitem; |
| 2556 | |
| 791 | 2557 parent = gtk_widget_get_parent(widget); |
| 856 | 2558 if (G_TYPE_FROM_INSTANCE(parent) == BONOBO_TYPE_DOCK_ITEM) |
| 2559 { | |
| 2560 /* Only menu & toolbar are dock items. Could tabline be? | |
| 2561 * Seem to be only the 2 defined in GNOME */ | |
| 2562 widget = parent; | |
| 2563 dockitem = BONOBO_DOCK_ITEM(widget); | |
| 2564 | |
| 2565 if (dockitem == NULL || dockitem->is_floating) | |
| 2566 return 0; | |
| 2567 item_orientation = bonobo_dock_item_get_orientation(dockitem); | |
| 2568 } | |
| 685 | 2569 } |
| 2570 #endif | |
| 2571 if (widget != NULL | |
| 2572 && item_orientation == orientation | |
| 2573 && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(widget) | |
| 2574 && GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(widget)) | |
| 2575 { | |
| 2576 if (orientation == GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL) | |
| 2577 return widget->allocation.height; | |
| 2578 else | |
| 2579 return widget->allocation.width; | |
| 2580 } | |
| 2581 return 0; | |
| 2582 } | |
| 2583 #endif | |
| 2584 | |
| 2585 static int | |
| 2586 get_menu_tool_width(void) | |
| 2587 { | |
| 2588 int width = 0; | |
| 2589 | |
| 2590 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME /* these are never vertical without GNOME */ | |
| 2591 # ifdef FEAT_MENU | |
| 2592 width += get_item_dimensions(gui.menubar, GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL); | |
| 2593 # endif | |
| 2594 # ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR | |
| 2595 width += get_item_dimensions(gui.toolbar, GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL); | |
| 2596 # endif | |
| 2597 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_TABLINE | |
| 782 | 2598 if (gui.tabline != NULL) |
| 2599 width += get_item_dimensions(gui.tabline, GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL); | |
| 685 | 2600 # endif |
| 2601 #endif | |
| 2602 | |
| 2603 return width; | |
| 2604 } | |
| 2605 | |
| 2606 static int | |
| 2607 get_menu_tool_height(void) | |
| 2608 { | |
| 2609 int height = 0; | |
| 2610 | |
| 2611 #ifdef FEAT_MENU | |
| 2612 height += get_item_dimensions(gui.menubar, GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL); | |
| 2613 #endif | |
| 2614 #ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR | |
| 2615 height += get_item_dimensions(gui.toolbar, GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL); | |
| 2616 #endif | |
| 2617 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_TABLINE | |
| 782 | 2618 if (gui.tabline != NULL) |
| 2619 height += get_item_dimensions(gui.tabline, GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL); | |
| 685 | 2620 #endif |
| 2621 | |
| 2622 return height; | |
| 2623 } | |
| 2624 | |
| 791 | 2625 /* This controls whether we can set the real window hints at |
| 2626 * start-up when in a GtkPlug. | |
| 2627 * 0 = normal processing (default) | |
| 2628 * 1 = init. hints set, no-one's tried to reset since last check | |
| 2629 * 2 = init. hints set, attempt made to change hints | |
| 2630 */ | |
| 2631 static int init_window_hints_state = 0; | |
| 2632 | |
| 685 | 2633 static void |
| 791 | 2634 update_window_manager_hints(int force_width, int force_height) |
| 685 | 2635 { |
| 2636 static int old_width = 0; | |
| 2637 static int old_height = 0; | |
| 791 | 2638 static int old_min_width = 0; |
| 2639 static int old_min_height = 0; | |
| 685 | 2640 static int old_char_width = 0; |
| 2641 static int old_char_height = 0; | |
| 2642 | |
| 2643 int width; | |
| 2644 int height; | |
| 791 | 2645 int min_width; |
| 2646 int min_height; | |
| 2647 | |
| 2648 /* At start-up, don't try to set the hints until the initial | |
| 2649 * values have been used (those that dictate our initial size) | |
| 1884 | 2650 * Let forced (i.e., correct) values through always. |
| 791 | 2651 */ |
| 2652 if (!(force_width && force_height) && init_window_hints_state > 0) | |
| 2653 { | |
| 856 | 2654 /* Don't do it! */ |
| 2655 init_window_hints_state = 2; | |
| 2656 return; | |
| 791 | 2657 } |
| 685 | 2658 |
| 2659 /* This also needs to be done when the main window isn't there yet, | |
| 2660 * otherwise the hints don't work. */ | |
| 2661 width = gui_get_base_width(); | |
| 2662 height = gui_get_base_height(); | |
| 2663 # ifdef FEAT_MENU | |
| 2664 height += tabline_height() * gui.char_height; | |
| 2665 # endif | |
| 2666 width += get_menu_tool_width(); | |
| 2667 height += get_menu_tool_height(); | |
| 2668 | |
| 791 | 2669 /* GtkSockets use GtkPlug's [gui,mainwin] min-size hints to determine |
| 1226 | 2670 * their actual widget size. When we set our size ourselves (e.g., |
| 791 | 2671 * 'set columns=' or init. -geom) we briefly set the min. to the size |
| 2672 * we wish to be instead of the legitimate minimum so that we actually | |
| 2673 * resize correctly. | |
| 2674 */ | |
| 2675 if (force_width && force_height) | |
| 2676 { | |
| 856 | 2677 min_width = force_width; |
| 2678 min_height = force_height; | |
| 791 | 2679 } |
| 2680 else | |
| 2681 { | |
| 856 | 2682 min_width = width + MIN_COLUMNS * gui.char_width; |
| 2683 min_height = height + MIN_LINES * gui.char_height; | |
| 791 | 2684 } |
| 2685 | |
| 685 | 2686 /* Avoid an expose event when the size didn't change. */ |
| 2687 if (width != old_width | |
| 2688 || height != old_height | |
| 856 | 2689 || min_width != old_min_width |
| 791 | 2690 || min_height != old_min_height |
| 685 | 2691 || gui.char_width != old_char_width |
| 2692 || gui.char_height != old_char_height) | |
| 2693 { | |
| 2694 GdkGeometry geometry; | |
| 2695 GdkWindowHints geometry_mask; | |
| 2696 | |
| 2697 geometry.width_inc = gui.char_width; | |
| 2698 geometry.height_inc = gui.char_height; | |
| 2699 geometry.base_width = width; | |
| 2700 geometry.base_height = height; | |
| 856 | 2701 geometry.min_width = min_width; |
| 2702 geometry.min_height = min_height; | |
| 685 | 2703 geometry_mask = GDK_HINT_BASE_SIZE|GDK_HINT_RESIZE_INC |
| 2704 |GDK_HINT_MIN_SIZE; | |
| 2705 /* Using gui.formwin as geometry widget doesn't work as expected | |
| 2706 * with GTK+ 2 -- dunno why. Presumably all the resizing hacks | |
| 2707 * in Vim confuse GTK+. */ | |
| 2708 gtk_window_set_geometry_hints(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), gui.mainwin, | |
| 2709 &geometry, geometry_mask); | |
| 856 | 2710 old_width = width; |
| 2711 old_height = height; | |
| 2712 old_min_width = min_width; | |
| 2713 old_min_height = min_height; | |
| 2714 old_char_width = gui.char_width; | |
| 2715 old_char_height = gui.char_height; | |
| 685 | 2716 } |
| 2717 } | |
| 2718 | |
| 7 | 2719 #ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR |
| 2720 | |
| 2721 /* | |
| 2722 * This extra effort wouldn't be necessary if we only used stock icons in the | |
| 2723 * toolbar, as we do for all builtin icons. But user-defined toolbar icons | |
| 2724 * shouldn't be treated differently, thus we do need this. | |
| 2725 */ | |
| 2726 static void | |
| 2727 icon_size_changed_foreach(GtkWidget *widget, gpointer user_data) | |
| 2728 { | |
| 2729 if (GTK_IS_IMAGE(widget)) | |
| 2730 { | |
| 2731 GtkImage *image = (GtkImage *)widget; | |
| 2732 | |
| 2733 /* User-defined icons are stored in a GtkIconSet */ | |
| 2734 if (gtk_image_get_storage_type(image) == GTK_IMAGE_ICON_SET) | |
| 2735 { | |
| 2736 GtkIconSet *icon_set; | |
| 2737 GtkIconSize icon_size; | |
| 2738 | |
| 2739 gtk_image_get_icon_set(image, &icon_set, &icon_size); | |
| 2740 icon_size = (GtkIconSize)(long)user_data; | |
| 2741 | |
| 2742 gtk_icon_set_ref(icon_set); | |
| 2743 gtk_image_set_from_icon_set(image, icon_set, icon_size); | |
| 2744 gtk_icon_set_unref(icon_set); | |
| 2745 } | |
| 2746 } | |
| 2747 else if (GTK_IS_CONTAINER(widget)) | |
| 2748 { | |
| 2749 gtk_container_foreach((GtkContainer *)widget, | |
| 2750 &icon_size_changed_foreach, | |
| 2751 user_data); | |
| 2752 } | |
| 2753 } | |
| 2754 | |
| 2755 static void | |
| 2756 set_toolbar_style(GtkToolbar *toolbar) | |
| 2757 { | |
| 2758 GtkToolbarStyle style; | |
| 2759 GtkIconSize size; | |
| 2760 GtkIconSize oldsize; | |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
2761 |
| 7 | 2762 if ((toolbar_flags & (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS | TOOLBAR_HORIZ)) |
| 2763 == (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS | TOOLBAR_HORIZ)) | |
| 2764 style = GTK_TOOLBAR_BOTH_HORIZ; | |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
2765 else if ((toolbar_flags & (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS)) |
| 7 | 2766 == (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS)) |
| 2767 style = GTK_TOOLBAR_BOTH; | |
| 2768 else if (toolbar_flags & TOOLBAR_TEXT) | |
| 2769 style = GTK_TOOLBAR_TEXT; | |
| 2770 else | |
| 2771 style = GTK_TOOLBAR_ICONS; | |
| 2772 | |
| 2773 gtk_toolbar_set_style(toolbar, style); | |
| 2774 gtk_toolbar_set_tooltips(toolbar, (toolbar_flags & TOOLBAR_TOOLTIPS) != 0); | |
| 2775 | |
| 2776 switch (tbis_flags) | |
| 2777 { | |
| 2778 case TBIS_TINY: size = GTK_ICON_SIZE_MENU; break; | |
| 2779 case TBIS_SMALL: size = GTK_ICON_SIZE_SMALL_TOOLBAR; break; | |
| 2780 case TBIS_MEDIUM: size = GTK_ICON_SIZE_BUTTON; break; | |
| 2781 case TBIS_LARGE: size = GTK_ICON_SIZE_LARGE_TOOLBAR; break; | |
| 2782 default: size = GTK_ICON_SIZE_INVALID; break; | |
| 2783 } | |
| 2784 oldsize = gtk_toolbar_get_icon_size(toolbar); | |
| 2785 | |
| 2786 if (size == GTK_ICON_SIZE_INVALID) | |
| 2787 { | |
| 2788 /* Let global user preferences decide the icon size. */ | |
| 2789 gtk_toolbar_unset_icon_size(toolbar); | |
| 2790 size = gtk_toolbar_get_icon_size(toolbar); | |
| 2791 } | |
| 2792 if (size != oldsize) | |
| 2793 { | |
| 2794 gtk_container_foreach(GTK_CONTAINER(toolbar), | |
| 2795 &icon_size_changed_foreach, | |
| 2796 GINT_TO_POINTER((int)size)); | |
| 2797 } | |
| 2798 gtk_toolbar_set_icon_size(toolbar, size); | |
| 2799 } | |
| 2800 | |
| 2801 #endif /* FEAT_TOOLBAR */ | |
| 2802 | |
| 685 | 2803 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_TABLINE) || defined(PROTO) |
| 2804 static int ignore_tabline_evt = FALSE; | |
| 689 | 2805 static GtkWidget *tabline_menu; |
| 846 | 2806 static GtkTooltips *tabline_tooltip; |
| 689 | 2807 static int clicked_page; /* page clicked in tab line */ |
| 2808 | |
| 2809 /* | |
| 2810 * Handle selecting an item in the tab line popup menu. | |
| 2811 */ | |
| 2812 static void | |
| 1884 | 2813 tabline_menu_handler(GtkMenuItem *item UNUSED, gpointer user_data) |
| 689 | 2814 { |
| 2815 /* Add the string cmd into input buffer */ | |
| 824 | 2816 send_tabline_menu_event(clicked_page, (int)(long)user_data); |
| 689 | 2817 } |
| 2818 | |
| 851 | 2819 static void |
| 2820 add_tabline_menu_item(GtkWidget *menu, char_u *text, int resp) | |
| 2821 { | |
| 2822 GtkWidget *item; | |
| 2823 char_u *utf_text; | |
| 2824 | |
| 2825 utf_text = CONVERT_TO_UTF8(text); | |
| 2826 item = gtk_menu_item_new_with_label((const char *)utf_text); | |
| 2827 gtk_widget_show(item); | |
| 2828 CONVERT_TO_UTF8_FREE(utf_text); | |
| 2829 | |
| 2830 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(menu), item); | |
| 2831 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(item), "activate", | |
| 2832 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(tabline_menu_handler), | |
| 1660 | 2833 (gpointer)(long)resp); |
| 851 | 2834 } |
| 2835 | |
| 689 | 2836 /* |
| 2837 * Create a menu for the tab line. | |
| 2838 */ | |
| 2839 static GtkWidget * | |
| 2840 create_tabline_menu(void) | |
| 2841 { | |
| 851 | 2842 GtkWidget *menu; |
| 689 | 2843 |
| 2844 menu = gtk_menu_new(); | |
| 851 | 2845 add_tabline_menu_item(menu, (char_u *)_("Close"), TABLINE_MENU_CLOSE); |
| 2846 add_tabline_menu_item(menu, (char_u *)_("New tab"), TABLINE_MENU_NEW); | |
| 2847 add_tabline_menu_item(menu, (char_u *)_("Open Tab..."), TABLINE_MENU_OPEN); | |
| 689 | 2848 |
| 2849 return menu; | |
| 2850 } | |
| 2851 | |
| 2852 static gboolean | |
| 2853 on_tabline_menu(GtkWidget *widget, GdkEvent *event) | |
| 2854 { | |
| 2855 /* Was this button press event ? */ | |
| 2856 if (event->type == GDK_BUTTON_PRESS) | |
| 2857 { | |
| 2858 GdkEventButton *bevent = (GdkEventButton *)event; | |
| 2859 int x = bevent->x; | |
| 851 | 2860 int y = bevent->y; |
| 2861 GtkWidget *tabwidget; | |
| 2862 GdkWindow *tabwin; | |
| 689 | 2863 |
| 844 | 2864 /* When ignoring events return TRUE so that the selected page doesn't |
| 2865 * change. */ | |
| 2866 if (hold_gui_events | |
| 2867 # ifdef FEAT_CMDWIN | |
| 2868 || cmdwin_type != 0 | |
| 2869 # endif | |
| 2870 ) | |
| 2871 return TRUE; | |
| 2872 | |
| 851 | 2873 tabwin = gdk_window_at_pointer(&x, &y); |
| 2874 gdk_window_get_user_data(tabwin, (gpointer)&tabwidget); | |
| 2875 clicked_page = (int)(long)gtk_object_get_user_data( | |
| 2876 GTK_OBJECT(tabwidget)); | |
| 689 | 2877 |
| 2878 /* If the event was generated for 3rd button popup the menu. */ | |
| 2879 if (bevent->button == 3) | |
| 2880 { | |
| 2881 gtk_menu_popup(GTK_MENU(widget), NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, | |
| 2882 bevent->button, bevent->time); | |
| 2883 /* We handled the event. */ | |
| 2884 return TRUE; | |
| 2885 } | |
| 868 | 2886 else if (bevent->button == 1) |
| 693 | 2887 { |
| 868 | 2888 if (clicked_page == 0) |
| 2889 { | |
| 1394 | 2890 /* Click after all tabs moves to next tab page. When "x" is |
| 2891 * small guess it's the left button. */ | |
|
2301
6f63294a1781
Avoid use of the GTK mail_loop() so that the GtkFileChooser can be used.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2278
diff
changeset
|
2892 send_tabline_event(x < 50 ? -1 : 0); |
| 868 | 2893 } |
| 693 | 2894 } |
| 689 | 2895 } |
| 844 | 2896 |
| 689 | 2897 /* We didn't handle the event. */ |
| 2898 return FALSE; | |
| 2899 } | |
| 685 | 2900 |
| 2901 /* | |
| 2902 * Handle selecting one of the tabs. | |
| 2903 */ | |
| 2904 static void | |
| 2905 on_select_tab( | |
| 1884 | 2906 GtkNotebook *notebook UNUSED, |
| 2907 GtkNotebookPage *page UNUSED, | |
| 944 | 2908 gint idx, |
| 1884 | 2909 gpointer data UNUSED) |
| 685 | 2910 { |
| 2911 if (!ignore_tabline_evt) | |
| 693 | 2912 { |
|
2301
6f63294a1781
Avoid use of the GTK mail_loop() so that the GtkFileChooser can be used.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2278
diff
changeset
|
2913 send_tabline_event(idx + 1); |
| 693 | 2914 } |
| 685 | 2915 } |
| 2916 | |
| 2917 /* | |
| 2918 * Show or hide the tabline. | |
| 2919 */ | |
| 2920 void | |
| 2921 gui_mch_show_tabline(int showit) | |
| 2922 { | |
| 2923 if (gui.tabline == NULL) | |
| 2924 return; | |
| 2925 | |
| 2926 if (!showit != !gtk_notebook_get_show_tabs(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline))) | |
| 2927 { | |
| 708 | 2928 /* Note: this may cause a resize event */ |
| 685 | 2929 gtk_notebook_set_show_tabs(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), showit); |
| 791 | 2930 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0); |
| 868 | 2931 if (showit) |
| 2932 GTK_WIDGET_UNSET_FLAGS(GTK_WIDGET(gui.tabline), GTK_CAN_FOCUS); | |
| 2933 } | |
| 2934 | |
| 2935 gui_mch_update(); | |
| 685 | 2936 } |
| 2937 | |
| 2938 /* | |
| 708 | 2939 * Return TRUE when tabline is displayed. |
| 2940 */ | |
| 2941 int | |
| 2942 gui_mch_showing_tabline(void) | |
| 2943 { | |
| 2944 return gui.tabline != NULL | |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
2945 && gtk_notebook_get_show_tabs(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline)); |
| 708 | 2946 } |
| 2947 | |
| 2948 /* | |
| 685 | 2949 * Update the labels of the tabline. |
| 2950 */ | |
| 2951 void | |
| 2952 gui_mch_update_tabline(void) | |
| 2953 { | |
| 2954 GtkWidget *page; | |
| 846 | 2955 GtkWidget *event_box; |
| 685 | 2956 GtkWidget *label; |
| 2957 tabpage_T *tp; | |
| 2958 int nr = 0; | |
| 851 | 2959 int tab_num; |
| 685 | 2960 int curtabidx = 0; |
| 836 | 2961 char_u *labeltext; |
| 685 | 2962 |
| 2963 if (gui.tabline == NULL) | |
| 2964 return; | |
| 2965 | |
| 2966 ignore_tabline_evt = TRUE; | |
| 2967 | |
| 2968 /* Add a label for each tab page. They all contain the same text area. */ | |
| 2969 for (tp = first_tabpage; tp != NULL; tp = tp->tp_next, ++nr) | |
| 2970 { | |
| 2971 if (tp == curtab) | |
| 2972 curtabidx = nr; | |
| 2973 | |
| 851 | 2974 tab_num = nr + 1; |
| 2975 | |
| 685 | 2976 page = gtk_notebook_get_nth_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), nr); |
| 2977 if (page == NULL) | |
| 2978 { | |
| 2979 /* Add notebook page */ | |
| 2980 page = gtk_vbox_new(FALSE, 0); | |
| 2981 gtk_widget_show(page); | |
| 846 | 2982 event_box = gtk_event_box_new(); |
| 2983 gtk_widget_show(event_box); | |
| 685 | 2984 label = gtk_label_new("-Empty-"); |
| 851 | 2985 gtk_misc_set_padding(GTK_MISC(label), 2, 2); |
| 846 | 2986 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(event_box), label); |
| 685 | 2987 gtk_widget_show(label); |
| 2988 gtk_notebook_insert_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), | |
| 2989 page, | |
| 846 | 2990 event_box, |
| 685 | 2991 nr++); |
| 2992 } | |
| 2993 | |
| 846 | 2994 event_box = gtk_notebook_get_tab_label(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), page); |
| 1660 | 2995 gtk_object_set_user_data(GTK_OBJECT(event_box), |
| 2996 (gpointer)(long)tab_num); | |
| 846 | 2997 label = GTK_BIN(event_box)->child; |
| 839 | 2998 get_tabline_label(tp, FALSE); |
| 836 | 2999 labeltext = CONVERT_TO_UTF8(NameBuff); |
| 846 | 3000 gtk_label_set_text(GTK_LABEL(label), (const char *)labeltext); |
| 836 | 3001 CONVERT_TO_UTF8_FREE(labeltext); |
| 846 | 3002 |
| 3003 get_tabline_label(tp, TRUE); | |
| 3004 labeltext = CONVERT_TO_UTF8(NameBuff); | |
| 3005 gtk_tooltips_set_tip(GTK_TOOLTIPS(tabline_tooltip), event_box, | |
| 3006 (const char *)labeltext, NULL); | |
| 3007 CONVERT_TO_UTF8_FREE(labeltext); | |
| 685 | 3008 } |
| 3009 | |
| 3010 /* Remove any old labels. */ | |
| 3011 while (gtk_notebook_get_nth_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), nr) != NULL) | |
| 3012 gtk_notebook_remove_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), nr); | |
| 3013 | |
| 3014 if (gtk_notebook_current_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline)) != curtabidx) | |
| 856 | 3015 gtk_notebook_set_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), curtabidx); |
| 685 | 3016 |
| 851 | 3017 /* Make sure everything is in place before drawing text. */ |
| 3018 gui_mch_update(); | |
| 3019 | |
| 685 | 3020 ignore_tabline_evt = FALSE; |
| 3021 } | |
| 3022 | |
| 3023 /* | |
| 3024 * Set the current tab to "nr". First tab is 1. | |
| 3025 */ | |
| 3026 void | |
| 3027 gui_mch_set_curtab(nr) | |
| 3028 int nr; | |
| 3029 { | |
| 3030 if (gui.tabline == NULL) | |
| 3031 return; | |
| 3032 | |
| 3033 ignore_tabline_evt = TRUE; | |
| 3034 if (gtk_notebook_current_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline)) != nr - 1) | |
| 856 | 3035 gtk_notebook_set_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), nr - 1); |
| 685 | 3036 ignore_tabline_evt = FALSE; |
| 3037 } | |
| 3038 | |
| 3039 #endif /* FEAT_GUI_TABLINE */ | |
| 3040 | |
| 7 | 3041 /* |
| 2183 | 3042 * Add selection targets for PRIMARY and CLIPBOARD selections. |
| 3043 */ | |
| 3044 void | |
| 3045 gui_gtk_set_selection_targets(void) | |
| 3046 { | |
| 3047 int i, j = 0; | |
| 3048 int n_targets = N_SELECTION_TARGETS; | |
| 3049 GtkTargetEntry targets[N_SELECTION_TARGETS]; | |
| 3050 | |
| 3051 for (i = 0; i < (int)N_SELECTION_TARGETS; ++i) | |
| 3052 { | |
| 3053 /* OpenOffice tries to use TARGET_HTML and fails when it doesn't | |
| 3054 * return something, instead of trying another target. Therefore only | |
| 3055 * offer TARGET_HTML when it works. */ | |
| 3056 if (!clip_html && selection_targets[i].info == TARGET_HTML) | |
| 3057 n_targets--; | |
| 3058 else | |
| 3059 targets[j++] = selection_targets[i]; | |
| 3060 } | |
| 3061 | |
| 3062 gtk_selection_clear_targets(gui.drawarea, (GdkAtom)GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY); | |
| 3063 gtk_selection_clear_targets(gui.drawarea, (GdkAtom)clip_plus.gtk_sel_atom); | |
| 3064 gtk_selection_add_targets(gui.drawarea, | |
| 3065 (GdkAtom)GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY, | |
| 3066 targets, n_targets); | |
| 3067 gtk_selection_add_targets(gui.drawarea, | |
| 3068 (GdkAtom)clip_plus.gtk_sel_atom, | |
| 3069 targets, n_targets); | |
| 3070 } | |
| 3071 | |
| 3072 /* | |
| 3073 * Set up for receiving DND items. | |
| 3074 */ | |
| 3075 void | |
| 3076 gui_gtk_set_dnd_targets(void) | |
| 3077 { | |
| 3078 int i, j = 0; | |
| 3079 int n_targets = N_DND_TARGETS; | |
| 3080 GtkTargetEntry targets[N_DND_TARGETS]; | |
| 3081 | |
| 3082 for (i = 0; i < (int)N_DND_TARGETS; ++i) | |
| 3083 { | |
| 3084 if (!clip_html && selection_targets[i].info == TARGET_HTML) | |
| 3085 n_targets--; | |
| 3086 else | |
| 3087 targets[j++] = dnd_targets[i]; | |
| 3088 } | |
| 3089 | |
| 3090 gtk_drag_dest_unset(gui.drawarea); | |
| 3091 gtk_drag_dest_set(gui.drawarea, | |
| 3092 GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_ALL, | |
| 3093 targets, n_targets, | |
| 2718 | 3094 GDK_ACTION_COPY | GDK_ACTION_MOVE); |
| 2183 | 3095 } |
| 3096 | |
| 3097 /* | |
| 7 | 3098 * Initialize the GUI. Create all the windows, set up all the callbacks etc. |
| 3099 * Returns OK for success, FAIL when the GUI can't be started. | |
| 3100 */ | |
| 3101 int | |
| 3102 gui_mch_init(void) | |
| 3103 { | |
| 3104 GtkWidget *vbox; | |
| 3105 | |
| 3106 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME | |
| 3107 /* Initialize the GNOME libraries. gnome_program_init()/gnome_init() | |
| 3108 * exits on failure, but that's a non-issue because we already called | |
| 3109 * gtk_init_check() in gui_mch_init_check(). */ | |
| 3110 if (using_gnome) | |
| 3111 gnome_program_init(VIMPACKAGE, VIM_VERSION_SHORT, | |
| 3112 LIBGNOMEUI_MODULE, gui_argc, gui_argv, NULL); | |
| 3113 #endif | |
| 3114 vim_free(gui_argv); | |
| 3115 gui_argv = NULL; | |
| 3116 | |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
3117 #if GLIB_CHECK_VERSION(2,1,3) |
| 7 | 3118 /* Set the human-readable application name */ |
| 3119 g_set_application_name("Vim"); | |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
3120 #endif |
| 7 | 3121 /* |
| 3122 * Force UTF-8 output no matter what the value of 'encoding' is. | |
| 3123 * did_set_string_option() in option.c prohibits changing 'termencoding' | |
| 3124 * to something else than UTF-8 if the GUI is in use. | |
| 3125 */ | |
| 3126 set_option_value((char_u *)"termencoding", 0L, (char_u *)"utf-8", 0); | |
| 3127 | |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
3128 #ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR |
| 7 | 3129 gui_gtk_register_stock_icons(); |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
3130 #endif |
| 7 | 3131 /* FIXME: Need to install the classic icons and a gtkrc.classic file. |
| 3132 * The hard part is deciding install locations and the Makefile magic. */ | |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
3133 #if 0 |
| 7 | 3134 gtk_rc_parse("gtkrc"); |
| 3135 #endif | |
| 3136 | |
| 3137 /* Initialize values */ | |
| 3138 gui.border_width = 2; | |
| 3139 gui.scrollbar_width = SB_DEFAULT_WIDTH; | |
| 3140 gui.scrollbar_height = SB_DEFAULT_WIDTH; | |
| 136 | 3141 /* LINTED: avoid warning: conversion to 'unsigned long' */ |
| 7 | 3142 gui.fgcolor = g_new0(GdkColor, 1); |
| 136 | 3143 /* LINTED: avoid warning: conversion to 'unsigned long' */ |
| 7 | 3144 gui.bgcolor = g_new0(GdkColor, 1); |
| 207 | 3145 /* LINTED: avoid warning: conversion to 'unsigned long' */ |
| 3146 gui.spcolor = g_new0(GdkColor, 1); | |
| 7 | 3147 |
| 3148 /* Initialise atoms */ | |
| 1904 | 3149 html_atom = gdk_atom_intern("text/html", FALSE); |
| 7 | 3150 utf8_string_atom = gdk_atom_intern("UTF8_STRING", FALSE); |
| 3151 | |
| 3152 /* Set default foreground and background colors. */ | |
| 3153 gui.norm_pixel = gui.def_norm_pixel; | |
| 3154 gui.back_pixel = gui.def_back_pixel; | |
| 3155 | |
| 3156 if (gtk_socket_id != 0) | |
| 3157 { | |
| 3158 GtkWidget *plug; | |
| 3159 | |
| 3160 /* Use GtkSocket from another app. */ | |
| 3161 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD | |
| 3162 plug = gtk_plug_new_for_display(gdk_display_get_default(), | |
| 3163 gtk_socket_id); | |
| 3164 #else | |
| 3165 plug = gtk_plug_new(gtk_socket_id); | |
| 3166 #endif | |
| 3167 if (plug != NULL && GTK_PLUG(plug)->socket_window != NULL) | |
| 3168 { | |
| 3169 gui.mainwin = plug; | |
| 3170 } | |
| 3171 else | |
| 3172 { | |
| 3173 g_warning("Connection to GTK+ socket (ID %u) failed", | |
| 3174 (unsigned int)gtk_socket_id); | |
| 3175 /* Pretend we never wanted it if it failed (get own window) */ | |
| 3176 gtk_socket_id = 0; | |
| 3177 } | |
| 3178 } | |
| 3179 | |
| 3180 if (gtk_socket_id == 0) | |
| 3181 { | |
| 3182 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME | |
| 3183 if (using_gnome) | |
| 3184 { | |
| 3185 gui.mainwin = gnome_app_new("Vim", NULL); | |
| 3186 # ifdef USE_XSMP | |
| 3187 /* Use the GNOME save-yourself functionality now. */ | |
| 3188 xsmp_close(); | |
| 3189 # endif | |
| 3190 } | |
| 3191 else | |
| 3192 #endif | |
| 3193 gui.mainwin = gtk_window_new(GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL); | |
| 3194 } | |
| 3195 | |
| 3196 gtk_widget_set_name(gui.mainwin, "vim-main-window"); | |
| 3197 | |
| 3198 /* Create the PangoContext used for drawing all text. */ | |
| 3199 gui.text_context = gtk_widget_create_pango_context(gui.mainwin); | |
| 3200 pango_context_set_base_dir(gui.text_context, PANGO_DIRECTION_LTR); | |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
3201 |
| 7 | 3202 gtk_container_border_width(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.mainwin), 0); |
| 3203 gtk_widget_add_events(gui.mainwin, GDK_VISIBILITY_NOTIFY_MASK); | |
| 3204 | |
| 3205 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "delete_event", | |
| 3206 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(&delete_event_cb), NULL); | |
| 3207 | |
| 3208 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "realize", | |
| 3209 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(&mainwin_realize), NULL); | |
| 3210 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD | |
| 3211 g_signal_connect(G_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "screen_changed", | |
| 3212 G_CALLBACK(&mainwin_screen_changed_cb), NULL); | |
| 3213 #endif | |
| 3214 gui.accel_group = gtk_accel_group_new(); | |
| 3215 gtk_window_add_accel_group(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), gui.accel_group); | |
| 3216 | |
| 685 | 3217 /* A vertical box holds the menubar, toolbar and main text window. */ |
| 7 | 3218 vbox = gtk_vbox_new(FALSE, 0); |
| 3219 | |
| 3220 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME | |
| 3221 if (using_gnome) | |
| 3222 { | |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
3223 # if defined(FEAT_MENU) |
| 7 | 3224 /* automagically restore menubar/toolbar placement */ |
| 3225 gnome_app_enable_layout_config(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin), TRUE); | |
| 3226 # endif | |
| 3227 gnome_app_set_contents(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin), vbox); | |
| 3228 } | |
| 3229 else | |
| 3230 #endif | |
| 3231 { | |
| 3232 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.mainwin), vbox); | |
| 3233 gtk_widget_show(vbox); | |
| 3234 } | |
| 3235 | |
| 3236 #ifdef FEAT_MENU | |
| 3237 /* | |
| 3238 * Create the menubar and handle | |
| 3239 */ | |
| 3240 gui.menubar = gtk_menu_bar_new(); | |
| 3241 gtk_widget_set_name(gui.menubar, "vim-menubar"); | |
| 3242 | |
| 36 | 3243 /* Avoid that GTK takes <F10> away from us. */ |
| 3244 { | |
| 3245 GtkSettings *gtk_settings; | |
| 3246 | |
| 3247 gtk_settings = gtk_settings_get_for_screen(gdk_screen_get_default()); | |
| 3248 g_object_set(gtk_settings, "gtk-menu-bar-accel", NULL, NULL); | |
| 3249 } | |
| 3250 | |
| 3251 | |
| 7 | 3252 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME |
| 3253 if (using_gnome) | |
| 3254 { | |
| 3255 BonoboDockItem *dockitem; | |
| 3256 | |
| 3257 gnome_app_set_menus(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin), GTK_MENU_BAR(gui.menubar)); | |
| 3258 dockitem = gnome_app_get_dock_item_by_name(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin), | |
| 3259 GNOME_APP_MENUBAR_NAME); | |
| 798 | 3260 /* We don't want the menu to float. */ |
| 3261 bonobo_dock_item_set_behavior(dockitem, | |
| 3262 bonobo_dock_item_get_behavior(dockitem) | |
| 3263 | BONOBO_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NEVER_FLOATING); | |
| 7 | 3264 gui.menubar_h = GTK_WIDGET(dockitem); |
| 3265 } | |
| 3266 else | |
| 3267 # endif /* FEAT_GUI_GNOME */ | |
| 3268 { | |
| 827 | 3269 /* Always show the menubar, otherwise <F10> doesn't work. It may be |
| 3270 * disabled in gui_init() later. */ | |
| 3271 gtk_widget_show(gui.menubar); | |
| 7 | 3272 gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(vbox), gui.menubar, FALSE, FALSE, 0); |
| 3273 } | |
| 3274 #endif /* FEAT_MENU */ | |
| 3275 | |
| 3276 #ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR | |
| 3277 /* | |
| 3278 * Create the toolbar and handle | |
| 3279 */ | |
| 3280 /* some aesthetics on the toolbar */ | |
| 3281 gtk_rc_parse_string( | |
| 3282 "style \"vim-toolbar-style\" {\n" | |
| 3283 " GtkToolbar::button_relief = GTK_RELIEF_NONE\n" | |
| 3284 "}\n" | |
| 3285 "widget \"*.vim-toolbar\" style \"vim-toolbar-style\"\n"); | |
| 3286 gui.toolbar = gtk_toolbar_new(); | |
| 3287 gtk_widget_set_name(gui.toolbar, "vim-toolbar"); | |
| 3288 set_toolbar_style(GTK_TOOLBAR(gui.toolbar)); | |
| 3289 | |
| 3290 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME | |
| 3291 if (using_gnome) | |
| 3292 { | |
| 3293 BonoboDockItem *dockitem; | |
| 3294 | |
| 3295 gnome_app_set_toolbar(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin), GTK_TOOLBAR(gui.toolbar)); | |
| 3296 dockitem = gnome_app_get_dock_item_by_name(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin), | |
| 3297 GNOME_APP_TOOLBAR_NAME); | |
| 3298 gui.toolbar_h = GTK_WIDGET(dockitem); | |
| 795 | 3299 /* When the toolbar is floating it gets stuck. So long as that isn't |
| 798 | 3300 * fixed let's disallow floating. */ |
| 795 | 3301 bonobo_dock_item_set_behavior(dockitem, |
| 798 | 3302 bonobo_dock_item_get_behavior(dockitem) |
| 3303 | BONOBO_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NEVER_FLOATING); | |
| 7 | 3304 gtk_container_set_border_width(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.toolbar), 0); |
| 3305 } | |
| 3306 else | |
| 3307 # endif /* FEAT_GUI_GNOME */ | |
| 3308 { | |
| 3309 if (vim_strchr(p_go, GO_TOOLBAR) != NULL | |
| 3310 && (toolbar_flags & (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS))) | |
| 3311 gtk_widget_show(gui.toolbar); | |
| 3312 gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(vbox), gui.toolbar, FALSE, FALSE, 0); | |
| 3313 } | |
| 3314 #endif /* FEAT_TOOLBAR */ | |
| 3315 | |
| 685 | 3316 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_TABLINE |
| 782 | 3317 /* |
| 3318 * Use a Notebook for the tab pages labels. The labels are hidden by | |
| 3319 * default. | |
| 3320 */ | |
| 791 | 3321 gui.tabline = gtk_notebook_new(); |
| 3322 gtk_widget_show(gui.tabline); | |
| 3323 gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(vbox), gui.tabline, FALSE, FALSE, 0); | |
| 3324 gtk_notebook_set_show_border(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), FALSE); | |
| 3325 gtk_notebook_set_show_tabs(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), FALSE); | |
| 841 | 3326 gtk_notebook_set_scrollable(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), TRUE); |
| 868 | 3327 gtk_notebook_set_tab_border(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), FALSE); |
| 791 | 3328 |
| 846 | 3329 tabline_tooltip = gtk_tooltips_new(); |
| 3330 gtk_tooltips_enable(GTK_TOOLTIPS(tabline_tooltip)); | |
| 3331 | |
| 3332 { | |
| 3333 GtkWidget *page, *label, *event_box; | |
| 791 | 3334 |
| 856 | 3335 /* Add the first tab. */ |
| 846 | 3336 page = gtk_vbox_new(FALSE, 0); |
| 3337 gtk_widget_show(page); | |
| 3338 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.tabline), page); | |
| 3339 label = gtk_label_new("-Empty-"); | |
| 3340 gtk_widget_show(label); | |
| 3341 event_box = gtk_event_box_new(); | |
| 3342 gtk_widget_show(event_box); | |
| 1660 | 3343 gtk_object_set_user_data(GTK_OBJECT(event_box), (gpointer)1L); |
| 851 | 3344 gtk_misc_set_padding(GTK_MISC(label), 2, 2); |
| 846 | 3345 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(event_box), label); |
| 3346 gtk_notebook_set_tab_label(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), page, event_box); | |
| 791 | 3347 } |
| 865 | 3348 |
| 791 | 3349 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.tabline), "switch_page", |
| 856 | 3350 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(on_select_tab), NULL); |
| 791 | 3351 |
| 3352 /* Create a popup menu for the tab line and connect it. */ | |
| 3353 tabline_menu = create_tabline_menu(); | |
| 3354 gtk_signal_connect_object(GTK_OBJECT(gui.tabline), "button_press_event", | |
| 856 | 3355 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(on_tabline_menu), GTK_OBJECT(tabline_menu)); |
| 685 | 3356 #endif |
| 3357 | |
| 7 | 3358 gui.formwin = gtk_form_new(); |
| 3359 gtk_container_border_width(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.formwin), 0); | |
| 3360 gtk_widget_set_events(gui.formwin, GDK_EXPOSURE_MASK); | |
| 3361 | |
| 3362 gui.drawarea = gtk_drawing_area_new(); | |
| 3363 | |
| 3364 /* Determine which events we will filter. */ | |
| 3365 gtk_widget_set_events(gui.drawarea, | |
| 3366 GDK_EXPOSURE_MASK | | |
| 3367 GDK_ENTER_NOTIFY_MASK | | |
| 3368 GDK_LEAVE_NOTIFY_MASK | | |
| 3369 GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | | |
| 3370 GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK | | |
| 3371 GDK_SCROLL_MASK | | |
| 3372 GDK_KEY_PRESS_MASK | | |
| 3373 GDK_KEY_RELEASE_MASK | | |
| 3374 GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | | |
| 3375 GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK); | |
| 3376 | |
| 3377 gtk_widget_show(gui.drawarea); | |
| 3378 gtk_form_put(GTK_FORM(gui.formwin), gui.drawarea, 0, 0); | |
| 3379 gtk_widget_show(gui.formwin); | |
| 3380 gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(vbox), gui.formwin, TRUE, TRUE, 0); | |
| 3381 | |
| 3382 /* For GtkSockets, key-presses must go to the focus widget (drawarea) | |
| 3383 * and not the window. */ | |
| 3384 gtk_signal_connect((gtk_socket_id == 0) ? GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin) | |
| 3385 : GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), | |
| 3386 "key_press_event", | |
| 3387 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(key_press_event), NULL); | |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
3388 #if defined(FEAT_XIM) |
| 7 | 3389 /* Also forward key release events for the benefit of GTK+ 2 input |
| 3390 * modules. Try CTRL-SHIFT-xdigits to enter a Unicode code point. */ | |
| 3391 g_signal_connect((gtk_socket_id == 0) ? G_OBJECT(gui.mainwin) | |
| 3392 : G_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), | |
| 3393 "key_release_event", | |
| 3394 G_CALLBACK(&key_release_event), NULL); | |
| 3395 #endif | |
| 3396 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "realize", | |
| 3397 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(drawarea_realize_cb), NULL); | |
| 3398 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "unrealize", | |
| 3399 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(drawarea_unrealize_cb), NULL); | |
| 3400 | |
| 3401 gtk_signal_connect_after(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "style_set", | |
| 3402 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(&drawarea_style_set_cb), NULL); | |
| 3403 | |
| 3404 gui.visibility = GDK_VISIBILITY_UNOBSCURED; | |
| 3405 | |
| 3406 #if !(defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION)) | |
| 3407 wm_protocols_atom = gdk_atom_intern("WM_PROTOCOLS", FALSE); | |
| 3408 save_yourself_atom = gdk_atom_intern("WM_SAVE_YOURSELF", FALSE); | |
| 3409 #endif | |
| 3410 | |
| 3411 if (gtk_socket_id != 0) | |
| 1884 | 3412 /* make sure keyboard input can go to the drawarea */ |
| 7 | 3413 GTK_WIDGET_SET_FLAGS(gui.drawarea, GTK_CAN_FOCUS); |
| 3414 | |
| 3415 /* | |
| 3416 * Set clipboard specific atoms | |
| 3417 */ | |
| 3418 vim_atom = gdk_atom_intern(VIM_ATOM_NAME, FALSE); | |
| 3419 vimenc_atom = gdk_atom_intern(VIMENC_ATOM_NAME, FALSE); | |
| 3420 clip_star.gtk_sel_atom = GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY; | |
| 3421 clip_plus.gtk_sel_atom = gdk_atom_intern("CLIPBOARD", FALSE); | |
| 3422 | |
| 3423 /* | |
| 3424 * Start out by adding the configured border width into the border offset. | |
| 3425 */ | |
| 3426 gui.border_offset = gui.border_width; | |
| 3427 | |
| 3428 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "visibility_notify_event", | |
| 3429 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(visibility_event), NULL); | |
| 3430 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "expose_event", | |
| 3431 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(expose_event), NULL); | |
| 3432 | |
| 3433 /* | |
| 3434 * Only install these enter/leave callbacks when 'p' in 'guioptions'. | |
| 3435 * Only needed for some window managers. | |
| 3436 */ | |
| 3437 if (vim_strchr(p_go, GO_POINTER) != NULL) | |
| 3438 { | |
| 3439 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "leave_notify_event", | |
| 3440 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(leave_notify_event), NULL); | |
| 3441 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "enter_notify_event", | |
| 3442 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(enter_notify_event), NULL); | |
| 3443 } | |
| 3444 | |
| 791 | 3445 /* Real windows can get focus ... GtkPlug, being a mere container can't, |
| 3446 * only its widgets. Arguably, this could be common code and we not use | |
| 3447 * the window focus at all, but let's be safe. | |
| 3448 */ | |
| 3449 if (gtk_socket_id == 0) | |
| 3450 { | |
| 856 | 3451 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "focus_out_event", |
| 3452 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(focus_out_event), NULL); | |
| 3453 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "focus_in_event", | |
| 3454 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(focus_in_event), NULL); | |
| 791 | 3455 } |
| 3456 else | |
| 3457 { | |
| 856 | 3458 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "focus_out_event", |
| 3459 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(focus_out_event), NULL); | |
| 3460 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "focus_in_event", | |
| 3461 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(focus_in_event), NULL); | |
| 791 | 3462 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_TABLINE |
| 856 | 3463 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.tabline), "focus_out_event", |
| 3464 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(focus_out_event), NULL); | |
| 3465 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.tabline), "focus_in_event", | |
| 3466 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(focus_in_event), NULL); | |
| 791 | 3467 #endif /* FEAT_GUI_TABLINE */ |
| 3468 } | |
| 7 | 3469 |
| 3470 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "motion_notify_event", | |
| 3471 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(motion_notify_event), NULL); | |
| 3472 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "button_press_event", | |
| 3473 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(button_press_event), NULL); | |
| 3474 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "button_release_event", | |
| 3475 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(button_release_event), NULL); | |
| 3476 g_signal_connect(G_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "scroll_event", | |
| 3477 G_CALLBACK(&scroll_event), NULL); | |
| 3478 | |
| 3479 /* | |
| 3480 * Add selection handler functions. | |
| 3481 */ | |
| 3482 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "selection_clear_event", | |
| 3483 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(selection_clear_event), NULL); | |
| 3484 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "selection_received", | |
| 3485 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(selection_received_cb), NULL); | |
| 3486 | |
| 2183 | 3487 gui_gtk_set_selection_targets(); |
| 7 | 3488 |
| 3489 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "selection_get", | |
| 3490 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(selection_get_cb), NULL); | |
| 3491 | |
| 3492 /* Pretend we don't have input focus, we will get an event if we do. */ | |
| 3493 gui.in_focus = FALSE; | |
| 3494 | |
| 3495 return OK; | |
| 3496 } | |
| 3497 | |
| 3498 #if (defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION)) || defined(PROTO) | |
| 3499 /* | |
| 3500 * This is called from gui_start() after a fork() has been done. | |
| 3501 * We have to tell the session manager our new PID. | |
| 3502 */ | |
| 3503 void | |
| 3504 gui_mch_forked(void) | |
| 3505 { | |
| 3506 if (using_gnome) | |
| 3507 { | |
| 3508 GnomeClient *client; | |
| 3509 | |
| 3510 client = gnome_master_client(); | |
| 3511 | |
| 3512 if (client != NULL) | |
| 3513 gnome_client_set_process_id(client, getpid()); | |
| 3514 } | |
| 3515 } | |
| 3516 #endif /* FEAT_GUI_GNOME && FEAT_SESSION */ | |
| 3517 | |
| 3518 /* | |
| 3519 * Called when the foreground or background color has been changed. | |
| 3520 * This used to change the graphics contexts directly but we are | |
| 3521 * currently manipulating them where desired. | |
| 3522 */ | |
| 3523 void | |
| 3524 gui_mch_new_colors(void) | |
| 3525 { | |
| 3526 if (gui.drawarea != NULL && gui.drawarea->window != NULL) | |
| 3527 { | |
| 3528 GdkColor color = { 0, 0, 0, 0 }; | |
| 3529 | |
| 3530 color.pixel = gui.back_pixel; | |
| 3531 gdk_window_set_background(gui.drawarea->window, &color); | |
| 3532 } | |
| 3533 } | |
| 3534 | |
| 3535 /* | |
| 3536 * This signal informs us about the need to rearrange our sub-widgets. | |
| 3537 */ | |
| 3538 static gint | |
| 1884 | 3539 form_configure_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
| 3540 GdkEventConfigure *event, | |
| 3541 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
| 7 | 3542 { |
| 791 | 3543 int usable_height = event->height; |
| 3544 | |
| 3545 /* When in a GtkPlug, we can't guarantee valid heights (as a round | |
| 3546 * no. of char-heights), so we have to manually sanitise them. | |
| 3547 * Widths seem to sort themselves out, don't ask me why. | |
| 3548 */ | |
| 3549 if (gtk_socket_id != 0) | |
| 856 | 3550 usable_height -= (gui.char_height - (gui.char_height/2)); /* sic. */ |
| 791 | 3551 |
| 7 | 3552 gtk_form_freeze(GTK_FORM(gui.formwin)); |
| 791 | 3553 gui_resize_shell(event->width, usable_height); |
| 7 | 3554 gtk_form_thaw(GTK_FORM(gui.formwin)); |
| 3555 | |
| 3556 return TRUE; | |
| 3557 } | |
| 3558 | |
| 3559 /* | |
| 3560 * Function called when window already closed. | |
| 3561 * We can't do much more here than to trying to preserve what had been done, | |
| 3562 * since the window is already inevitably going away. | |
| 3563 */ | |
| 3564 static void | |
| 1884 | 3565 mainwin_destroy_cb(GtkObject *object UNUSED, gpointer data UNUSED) |
| 7 | 3566 { |
| 3567 /* Don't write messages to the GUI anymore */ | |
| 3568 full_screen = FALSE; | |
| 3569 | |
| 3570 gui.mainwin = NULL; | |
| 3571 gui.drawarea = NULL; | |
| 3572 | |
| 3573 if (!exiting) /* only do anything if the destroy was unexpected */ | |
| 3574 { | |
| 419 | 3575 vim_strncpy(IObuff, |
| 3576 (char_u *)_("Vim: Main window unexpectedly destroyed\n"), | |
| 3577 IOSIZE - 1); | |
| 7 | 3578 preserve_exit(); |
| 3579 } | |
| 3580 } | |
| 3581 | |
| 791 | 3582 |
| 3583 /* | |
| 3584 * Bit of a hack to ensure we start GtkPlug windows with the correct window | |
| 3585 * hints (and thus the required size from -geom), but that after that we | |
| 3586 * put the hints back to normal (the actual minimum size) so we may | |
| 3587 * subsequently be resized smaller. GtkSocket (the parent end) uses the | |
| 1226 | 3588 * plug's window 'min hints to set *it's* minimum size, but that's also the |
| 791 | 3589 * only way we have of making ourselves bigger (by set lines/columns). |
| 3590 * Thus set hints at start-up to ensure correct init. size, then a | |
| 3591 * second after the final attempt to reset the real minimum hinst (done by | |
| 1226 | 3592 * scrollbar init.), actually do the standard hinst and stop the timer. |
| 791 | 3593 * We'll not let the default hints be set while this timer's active. |
| 3594 */ | |
| 3595 static gboolean | |
| 1884 | 3596 check_startup_plug_hints(gpointer data UNUSED) |
| 791 | 3597 { |
| 3598 if (init_window_hints_state == 1) | |
| 3599 { | |
| 856 | 3600 /* Safe to use normal hints now */ |
| 3601 init_window_hints_state = 0; | |
| 3602 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0); | |
| 3603 return FALSE; /* stop timer */ | |
| 791 | 3604 } |
| 3605 | |
| 3606 /* Keep on trying */ | |
| 3607 init_window_hints_state = 1; | |
| 3608 return TRUE; | |
| 3609 } | |
| 3610 | |
| 7 | 3611 /* |
| 3612 * Open the GUI window which was created by a call to gui_mch_init(). | |
| 3613 */ | |
| 3614 int | |
| 3615 gui_mch_open(void) | |
| 3616 { | |
| 3617 guicolor_T fg_pixel = INVALCOLOR; | |
| 3618 guicolor_T bg_pixel = INVALCOLOR; | |
| 1966 | 3619 guint pixel_width; |
| 3620 guint pixel_height; | |
| 7 | 3621 |
| 3622 /* | |
| 3623 * Allow setting a window role on the command line, or invent one | |
| 3624 * if none was specified. This is mainly useful for GNOME session | |
| 3625 * support; allowing the WM to restore window placement. | |
| 3626 */ | |
| 3627 if (role_argument != NULL) | |
| 3628 { | |
| 3629 gtk_window_set_role(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), role_argument); | |
| 3630 } | |
| 3631 else | |
| 3632 { | |
| 3633 char *role; | |
| 3634 | |
| 3635 /* Invent a unique-enough ID string for the role */ | |
| 3636 role = g_strdup_printf("vim-%u-%u-%u", | |
| 3637 (unsigned)mch_get_pid(), | |
| 3638 (unsigned)g_random_int(), | |
| 3639 (unsigned)time(NULL)); | |
| 3640 | |
| 3641 gtk_window_set_role(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), role); | |
| 3642 g_free(role); | |
| 3643 } | |
| 3644 | |
| 3645 if (gui_win_x != -1 && gui_win_y != -1) | |
| 3646 gtk_window_move(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), gui_win_x, gui_win_y); | |
| 3647 | |
| 3648 /* Determine user specified geometry, if present. */ | |
| 3649 if (gui.geom != NULL) | |
| 3650 { | |
| 3651 int mask; | |
| 3652 unsigned int w, h; | |
| 3653 int x = 0; | |
| 3654 int y = 0; | |
| 3655 | |
| 3656 mask = XParseGeometry((char *)gui.geom, &x, &y, &w, &h); | |
| 3657 | |
| 3658 if (mask & WidthValue) | |
| 3659 Columns = w; | |
| 3660 if (mask & HeightValue) | |
| 857 | 3661 { |
| 1884 | 3662 if (p_window > (long)h - 1 || !option_was_set((char_u *)"window")) |
| 857 | 3663 p_window = h - 1; |
| 7 | 3664 Rows = h; |
| 857 | 3665 } |
| 1426 | 3666 |
| 3667 pixel_width = (guint)(gui_get_base_width() + Columns * gui.char_width); | |
| 3668 pixel_height = (guint)(gui_get_base_height() + Rows * gui.char_height); | |
| 3669 | |
| 3670 pixel_width += get_menu_tool_width(); | |
| 3671 pixel_height += get_menu_tool_height(); | |
| 3672 | |
| 7 | 3673 if (mask & (XValue | YValue)) |
| 1426 | 3674 { |
| 1757 | 3675 int ww, hh; |
| 3676 gui_mch_get_screen_dimensions(&ww, &hh); | |
| 3677 hh += p_ghr + get_menu_tool_height(); | |
| 3678 ww += get_menu_tool_width(); | |
| 1426 | 3679 if (mask & XNegative) |
| 1757 | 3680 x += ww - pixel_width; |
| 1426 | 3681 if (mask & YNegative) |
| 1757 | 3682 y += hh - pixel_height; |
| 7 | 3683 gtk_window_move(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), x, y); |
| 1426 | 3684 } |
| 7 | 3685 vim_free(gui.geom); |
| 3686 gui.geom = NULL; | |
| 791 | 3687 |
| 856 | 3688 /* From now until everyone's stopped trying to set the window hints |
| 3689 * to their correct minimum values, stop them being set as we need | |
| 3690 * them to remain at our required size for the parent GtkSocket to | |
| 3691 * give us the right initial size. | |
| 3692 */ | |
| 791 | 3693 if (gtk_socket_id != 0 && (mask & WidthValue || mask & HeightValue)) |
| 856 | 3694 { |
| 3695 update_window_manager_hints(pixel_width, pixel_height); | |
| 3696 init_window_hints_state = 1; | |
| 3697 g_timeout_add(1000, check_startup_plug_hints, NULL); | |
| 3698 } | |
| 7 | 3699 } |
| 3700 | |
| 1966 | 3701 pixel_width = (guint)(gui_get_base_width() + Columns * gui.char_width); |
| 3702 pixel_height = (guint)(gui_get_base_height() + Rows * gui.char_height); | |
| 3703 /* For GTK2 changing the size of the form widget doesn't cause window | |
| 3704 * resizing. */ | |
|
2254
4620acaf4814
One more fix for conceal patch.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2248
diff
changeset
|
3705 if (gtk_socket_id == 0) |
| 1966 | 3706 gtk_window_resize(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), pixel_width, pixel_height); |
| 791 | 3707 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0); |
| 7 | 3708 |
| 3709 if (foreground_argument != NULL) | |
| 3710 fg_pixel = gui_get_color((char_u *)foreground_argument); | |
| 3711 if (fg_pixel == INVALCOLOR) | |
| 3712 fg_pixel = gui_get_color((char_u *)"Black"); | |
| 3713 | |
| 3714 if (background_argument != NULL) | |
| 3715 bg_pixel = gui_get_color((char_u *)background_argument); | |
| 3716 if (bg_pixel == INVALCOLOR) | |
| 3717 bg_pixel = gui_get_color((char_u *)"White"); | |
| 3718 | |
| 3719 if (found_reverse_arg) | |
| 3720 { | |
| 3721 gui.def_norm_pixel = bg_pixel; | |
| 3722 gui.def_back_pixel = fg_pixel; | |
| 3723 } | |
| 3724 else | |
| 3725 { | |
| 3726 gui.def_norm_pixel = fg_pixel; | |
| 3727 gui.def_back_pixel = bg_pixel; | |
| 3728 } | |
| 3729 | |
| 3730 /* Get the colors from the "Normal" and "Menu" group (set in syntax.c or | |
| 3731 * in a vimrc file) */ | |
| 3732 set_normal_colors(); | |
| 3733 | |
| 3734 /* Check that none of the colors are the same as the background color */ | |
| 3735 gui_check_colors(); | |
| 3736 | |
| 3737 /* Get the colors for the highlight groups (gui_check_colors() might have | |
| 3738 * changed them). */ | |
| 3739 highlight_gui_started(); /* re-init colors and fonts */ | |
| 3740 | |
| 3741 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "destroy", | |
| 3742 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(mainwin_destroy_cb), NULL); | |
| 3743 | |
| 3744 #ifdef FEAT_HANGULIN | |
| 3745 hangul_keyboard_set(); | |
| 3746 #endif | |
| 3747 | |
| 3748 /* | |
| 3749 * Notify the fixed area about the need to resize the contents of the | |
| 3750 * gui.formwin, which we use for random positioning of the included | |
| 3751 * components. | |
| 3752 * | |
| 3753 * We connect this signal deferred finally after anything is in place, | |
| 3754 * since this is intended to handle resizements coming from the window | |
| 3755 * manager upon us and should not interfere with what VIM is requesting | |
| 3756 * upon startup. | |
| 3757 */ | |
| 3758 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.formwin), "configure_event", | |
| 3759 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(form_configure_event), NULL); | |
| 3760 | |
| 3761 #ifdef FEAT_DND | |
| 2183 | 3762 /* Set up for receiving DND items. */ |
| 3763 gui_gtk_set_dnd_targets(); | |
| 7 | 3764 |
| 3765 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "drag_data_received", | |
| 3766 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(drag_data_received_cb), NULL); | |
| 3767 #endif | |
| 3768 | |
| 3769 /* With GTK+ 2, we need to iconify the window before calling show() | |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
3770 * to avoid mapping the window for a short time. */ |
| 7 | 3771 if (found_iconic_arg && gtk_socket_id == 0) |
| 3772 gui_mch_iconify(); | |
| 3773 | |
| 3774 { | |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
3775 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_MENU) |
| 7 | 3776 unsigned long menu_handler = 0; |
| 3777 # ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR | |
| 3778 unsigned long tool_handler = 0; | |
| 3779 # endif | |
| 3780 /* | |
| 3781 * Urgh hackish :/ For some reason BonoboDockLayout always forces a | |
| 3782 * show when restoring the saved layout configuration. We can't just | |
| 3783 * hide the widgets again after gtk_widget_show(gui.mainwin) since it's | |
| 3784 * a toplevel window and thus will be realized immediately. Instead, | |
| 3785 * connect signal handlers to hide the widgets just after they've been | |
| 3786 * marked visible, but before the main window is realized. | |
| 3787 */ | |
| 3788 if (using_gnome && vim_strchr(p_go, GO_MENUS) == NULL) | |
| 3789 menu_handler = g_signal_connect_after(gui.menubar_h, "show", | |
| 3790 G_CALLBACK(>k_widget_hide), | |
| 3791 NULL); | |
| 3792 # ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR | |
| 3793 if (using_gnome && vim_strchr(p_go, GO_TOOLBAR) == NULL | |
| 3794 && (toolbar_flags & (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS))) | |
| 3795 tool_handler = g_signal_connect_after(gui.toolbar_h, "show", | |
| 3796 G_CALLBACK(>k_widget_hide), | |
| 3797 NULL); | |
| 3798 # endif | |
| 3799 #endif | |
| 3800 gtk_widget_show(gui.mainwin); | |
| 3801 | |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
3802 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_MENU) |
| 7 | 3803 if (menu_handler != 0) |
| 3804 g_signal_handler_disconnect(gui.menubar_h, menu_handler); | |
| 3805 # ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR | |
| 3806 if (tool_handler != 0) | |
| 3807 g_signal_handler_disconnect(gui.toolbar_h, tool_handler); | |
| 3808 # endif | |
| 3809 #endif | |
| 3810 } | |
| 3811 | |
| 3812 return OK; | |
| 3813 } | |
| 3814 | |
| 3815 | |
| 3816 void | |
| 1884 | 3817 gui_mch_exit(int rc UNUSED) |
| 7 | 3818 { |
| 3819 if (gui.mainwin != NULL) | |
| 3820 gtk_widget_destroy(gui.mainwin); | |
| 3821 } | |
| 3822 | |
| 3823 /* | |
| 3824 * Get the position of the top left corner of the window. | |
| 3825 */ | |
| 3826 int | |
| 3827 gui_mch_get_winpos(int *x, int *y) | |
| 3828 { | |
| 3829 gtk_window_get_position(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), x, y); | |
| 3830 return OK; | |
| 3831 } | |
| 3832 | |
| 3833 /* | |
| 3834 * Set the position of the top left corner of the window to the given | |
| 3835 * coordinates. | |
| 3836 */ | |
| 3837 void | |
| 3838 gui_mch_set_winpos(int x, int y) | |
| 3839 { | |
| 3840 gtk_window_move(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), x, y); | |
| 3841 } | |
| 3842 | |
| 3843 #if 0 | |
| 3844 static int resize_idle_installed = FALSE; | |
| 3845 /* | |
| 3846 * Idle handler to force resize. Used by gui_mch_set_shellsize() to ensure | |
| 3847 * the shell size doesn't exceed the window size, i.e. if the window manager | |
| 3848 * ignored our size request. Usually this happens if the window is maximized. | |
| 3849 * | |
| 3850 * FIXME: It'd be nice if we could find a little more orthodox solution. | |
| 3851 * See also the remark below in gui_mch_set_shellsize(). | |
| 3852 * | |
| 3853 * DISABLED: When doing ":set lines+=1" this function would first invoke | |
| 3854 * gui_resize_shell() with the old size, then the normal callback would | |
| 3855 * report the new size through form_configure_event(). That caused the window | |
| 3856 * layout to be messed up. | |
| 3857 */ | |
| 3858 static gboolean | |
| 3859 force_shell_resize_idle(gpointer data) | |
| 3860 { | |
| 3861 if (gui.mainwin != NULL | |
| 3862 && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(gui.mainwin) | |
| 3863 && GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(gui.mainwin)) | |
| 3864 { | |
| 3865 int width; | |
| 3866 int height; | |
| 3867 | |
| 3868 gtk_window_get_size(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), &width, &height); | |
| 3869 | |
| 3870 width -= get_menu_tool_width(); | |
| 3871 height -= get_menu_tool_height(); | |
| 3872 | |
| 3873 gui_resize_shell(width, height); | |
| 3874 } | |
| 3875 | |
| 3876 resize_idle_installed = FALSE; | |
| 3877 return FALSE; /* don't call me again */ | |
| 3878 } | |
| 3879 #endif | |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
3880 |
| 1967 | 3881 /* |
| 3882 * Return TRUE if the main window is maximized. | |
| 3883 */ | |
| 3884 int | |
| 3885 gui_mch_maximized() | |
| 3886 { | |
| 3887 return (gui.mainwin != NULL && gui.mainwin->window != NULL | |
| 3888 && (gdk_window_get_state(gui.mainwin->window) | |
| 3889 & GDK_WINDOW_STATE_MAXIMIZED)); | |
| 3890 } | |
| 3891 | |
| 3892 /* | |
| 3893 * Unmaximize the main window | |
| 3894 */ | |
| 3895 void | |
| 3896 gui_mch_unmaximize() | |
| 3897 { | |
| 3898 if (gui.mainwin != NULL) | |
| 3899 gtk_window_unmaximize(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin)); | |
| 3900 } | |
| 3901 | |
| 7 | 3902 /* |
| 3014 | 3903 * Called when the font changed while the window is maximized. Compute the |
| 3904 * new Rows and Columns. This is like resizing the window. | |
| 3905 */ | |
| 3906 void | |
| 3907 gui_mch_newfont() | |
| 3908 { | |
| 3909 int w, h; | |
| 3910 | |
| 3911 gtk_window_get_size(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), &w, &h); | |
| 3912 w -= get_menu_tool_width(); | |
| 3913 h -= get_menu_tool_height(); | |
| 3914 gui_resize_shell(w, h); | |
| 3915 } | |
| 3916 | |
| 3917 /* | |
| 7 | 3918 * Set the windows size. |
| 3919 */ | |
| 3920 void | |
| 3921 gui_mch_set_shellsize(int width, int height, | |
| 1884 | 3922 int min_width UNUSED, int min_height UNUSED, |
| 3923 int base_width UNUSED, int base_height UNUSED, | |
| 3924 int direction UNUSED) | |
| 7 | 3925 { |
| 3926 /* give GTK+ a chance to put all widget's into place */ | |
| 3927 gui_mch_update(); | |
| 3928 | |
| 791 | 3929 /* this will cause the proper resizement to happen too */ |
| 3930 if (gtk_socket_id == 0) | |
| 856 | 3931 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0); |
| 791 | 3932 |
| 7 | 3933 /* With GTK+ 2, changing the size of the form widget doesn't resize |
| 791 | 3934 * the window. So let's do it the other way around and resize the |
| 7 | 3935 * main window instead. */ |
| 3936 width += get_menu_tool_width(); | |
| 3937 height += get_menu_tool_height(); | |
| 3938 | |
| 791 | 3939 if (gtk_socket_id == 0) |
| 856 | 3940 gtk_window_resize(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), width, height); |
| 791 | 3941 else |
| 856 | 3942 update_window_manager_hints(width, height); |
| 7 | 3943 |
| 2183 | 3944 # if 0 |
| 7 | 3945 if (!resize_idle_installed) |
| 3946 { | |
| 3947 g_idle_add_full(GDK_PRIORITY_EVENTS + 10, | |
| 3948 &force_shell_resize_idle, NULL, NULL); | |
| 3949 resize_idle_installed = TRUE; | |
| 3950 } | |
| 2183 | 3951 # endif |
| 7 | 3952 /* |
| 3953 * Wait until all events are processed to prevent a crash because the | |
| 3954 * real size of the drawing area doesn't reflect Vim's internal ideas. | |
| 3955 * | |
| 3956 * This is a bit of a hack, since Vim is a terminal application with a GUI | |
| 3957 * on top, while the GUI expects to be the boss. | |
| 3958 */ | |
| 3959 gui_mch_update(); | |
| 3960 } | |
| 3961 | |
| 3962 | |
| 3963 /* | |
| 3964 * The screen size is used to make sure the initial window doesn't get bigger | |
| 3965 * than the screen. This subtracts some room for menubar, toolbar and window | |
| 3966 * decorations. | |
| 3967 */ | |
| 3968 void | |
| 3969 gui_mch_get_screen_dimensions(int *screen_w, int *screen_h) | |
| 3970 { | |
| 3971 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD | |
| 3972 GdkScreen* screen; | |
| 3973 | |
| 3974 if (gui.mainwin != NULL && gtk_widget_has_screen(gui.mainwin)) | |
| 3975 screen = gtk_widget_get_screen(gui.mainwin); | |
| 3976 else | |
| 3977 screen = gdk_screen_get_default(); | |
| 3978 | |
| 3979 *screen_w = gdk_screen_get_width(screen); | |
| 3980 *screen_h = gdk_screen_get_height(screen) - p_ghr; | |
| 3981 #else | |
| 3982 *screen_w = gdk_screen_width(); | |
| 3983 /* Subtract 'guiheadroom' from the height to allow some room for the | |
| 3984 * window manager (task list and window title bar). */ | |
| 3985 *screen_h = gdk_screen_height() - p_ghr; | |
| 3986 #endif | |
| 3987 | |
| 3988 /* | |
| 3989 * FIXME: dirty trick: Because the gui_get_base_height() doesn't include | |
| 3990 * the toolbar and menubar for GTK, we subtract them from the screen | |
|
2278
0b3be97064e5
Various small fixes from Dominique Pelle.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2275
diff
changeset
|
3991 * height, so that the window size can be made to fit on the screen. |
| 7 | 3992 * This should be completely changed later. |
| 3993 */ | |
| 3994 *screen_w -= get_menu_tool_width(); | |
| 3995 *screen_h -= get_menu_tool_height(); | |
| 3996 } | |
| 3997 | |
| 3998 #if defined(FEAT_TITLE) || defined(PROTO) | |
| 3999 void | |
| 1884 | 4000 gui_mch_settitle(char_u *title, char_u *icon UNUSED) |
| 7 | 4001 { |
| 4002 if (title != NULL && output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
| 4003 title = string_convert(&output_conv, title, NULL); | |
| 4004 | |
| 4005 gtk_window_set_title(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), (const char *)title); | |
| 4006 | |
| 4007 if (output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
| 4008 vim_free(title); | |
| 4009 } | |
| 4010 #endif /* FEAT_TITLE */ | |
| 4011 | |
| 4012 #if defined(FEAT_MENU) || defined(PROTO) | |
| 4013 void | |
| 4014 gui_mch_enable_menu(int showit) | |
| 4015 { | |
| 4016 GtkWidget *widget; | |
| 4017 | |
| 4018 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME | |
| 4019 if (using_gnome) | |
| 4020 widget = gui.menubar_h; | |
| 4021 else | |
| 4022 # endif | |
| 4023 widget = gui.menubar; | |
| 4024 | |
| 827 | 4025 /* Do not disable the menu while starting up, otherwise F10 doesn't work. */ |
| 4026 if (!showit != !GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(widget) && !gui.starting) | |
| 7 | 4027 { |
| 4028 if (showit) | |
| 4029 gtk_widget_show(widget); | |
| 4030 else | |
| 4031 gtk_widget_hide(widget); | |
| 4032 | |
| 791 | 4033 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0); |
| 7 | 4034 } |
| 4035 } | |
| 4036 #endif /* FEAT_MENU */ | |
| 4037 | |
| 4038 #if defined(FEAT_TOOLBAR) || defined(PROTO) | |
| 4039 void | |
| 4040 gui_mch_show_toolbar(int showit) | |
| 4041 { | |
| 4042 GtkWidget *widget; | |
| 4043 | |
| 4044 if (gui.toolbar == NULL) | |
| 4045 return; | |
| 4046 | |
| 4047 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME | |
| 4048 if (using_gnome) | |
| 4049 widget = gui.toolbar_h; | |
| 4050 else | |
| 4051 # endif | |
| 4052 widget = gui.toolbar; | |
| 4053 | |
| 4054 if (showit) | |
| 4055 set_toolbar_style(GTK_TOOLBAR(gui.toolbar)); | |
| 4056 | |
| 4057 if (!showit != !GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(widget)) | |
| 4058 { | |
| 4059 if (showit) | |
| 4060 gtk_widget_show(widget); | |
| 4061 else | |
| 4062 gtk_widget_hide(widget); | |
| 4063 | |
| 791 | 4064 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0); |
| 7 | 4065 } |
| 4066 } | |
| 4067 #endif /* FEAT_TOOLBAR */ | |
| 4068 | |
| 4069 /* | |
| 4070 * Check if a given font is a CJK font. This is done in a very crude manner. It | |
| 4071 * just see if U+04E00 for zh and ja and U+AC00 for ko are covered in a given | |
| 4072 * font. Consequently, this function cannot be used as a general purpose check | |
| 4073 * for CJK-ness for which fontconfig APIs should be used. This is only used by | |
| 4074 * gui_mch_init_font() to deal with 'CJK fixed width fonts'. | |
| 4075 */ | |
| 4076 static int | |
| 4077 is_cjk_font(PangoFontDescription *font_desc) | |
| 4078 { | |
| 4079 static const char * const cjk_langs[] = | |
| 4080 {"zh_CN", "zh_TW", "zh_HK", "ja", "ko"}; | |
| 4081 | |
| 4082 PangoFont *font; | |
| 4083 unsigned i; | |
| 4084 int is_cjk = FALSE; | |
| 4085 | |
| 4086 font = pango_context_load_font(gui.text_context, font_desc); | |
| 4087 | |
| 4088 if (font == NULL) | |
| 4089 return FALSE; | |
| 4090 | |
| 4091 for (i = 0; !is_cjk && i < G_N_ELEMENTS(cjk_langs); ++i) | |
| 4092 { | |
| 4093 PangoCoverage *coverage; | |
| 4094 gunichar uc; | |
| 4095 | |
| 4096 coverage = pango_font_get_coverage( | |
| 4097 font, pango_language_from_string(cjk_langs[i])); | |
| 4098 | |
| 4099 if (coverage != NULL) | |
| 4100 { | |
| 4101 uc = (cjk_langs[i][0] == 'k') ? 0xAC00 : 0x4E00; | |
| 4102 is_cjk = (pango_coverage_get(coverage, uc) == PANGO_COVERAGE_EXACT); | |
| 4103 pango_coverage_unref(coverage); | |
| 4104 } | |
| 4105 } | |
| 4106 | |
| 4107 g_object_unref(font); | |
| 4108 | |
| 4109 return is_cjk; | |
| 4110 } | |
| 4111 | |
| 445 | 4112 /* |
| 4113 * Adjust gui.char_height (after 'linespace' was changed). | |
| 4114 */ | |
| 7 | 4115 int |
| 445 | 4116 gui_mch_adjust_charheight(void) |
| 7 | 4117 { |
| 4118 PangoFontMetrics *metrics; | |
| 4119 int ascent; | |
| 4120 int descent; | |
| 4121 | |
| 4122 metrics = pango_context_get_metrics(gui.text_context, gui.norm_font, | |
| 4123 pango_context_get_language(gui.text_context)); | |
| 4124 ascent = pango_font_metrics_get_ascent(metrics); | |
| 4125 descent = pango_font_metrics_get_descent(metrics); | |
| 4126 | |
| 4127 pango_font_metrics_unref(metrics); | |
| 4128 | |
| 4129 gui.char_height = (ascent + descent + PANGO_SCALE - 1) / PANGO_SCALE | |
| 445 | 4130 + p_linespace; |
| 136 | 4131 /* LINTED: avoid warning: bitwise operation on signed value */ |
| 7 | 4132 gui.char_ascent = PANGO_PIXELS(ascent + p_linespace * PANGO_SCALE / 2); |
| 4133 | |
| 4134 /* A not-positive value of char_height may crash Vim. Only happens | |
| 4135 * if 'linespace' is negative (which does make sense sometimes). */ | |
| 4136 gui.char_ascent = MAX(gui.char_ascent, 0); | |
| 4137 gui.char_height = MAX(gui.char_height, gui.char_ascent + 1); | |
| 4138 | |
| 4139 return OK; | |
| 4140 } | |
| 4141 | |
| 4142 /* | |
| 4143 * Put up a font dialog and return the selected font name in allocated memory. | |
| 4144 * "oldval" is the previous value. Return NULL when cancelled. | |
| 4145 * This should probably go into gui_gtk.c. Hmm. | |
| 4146 * FIXME: | |
| 4147 * The GTK2 font selection dialog has no filtering API. So we could either | |
| 4148 * a) implement our own (possibly copying the code from somewhere else) or | |
| 4149 * b) just live with it. | |
| 4150 */ | |
| 4151 char_u * | |
| 4152 gui_mch_font_dialog(char_u *oldval) | |
| 4153 { | |
| 4154 GtkWidget *dialog; | |
| 4155 int response; | |
| 4156 char_u *fontname = NULL; | |
| 4157 char_u *oldname; | |
| 4158 | |
| 4159 dialog = gtk_font_selection_dialog_new(NULL); | |
| 4160 | |
| 4161 gtk_window_set_transient_for(GTK_WINDOW(dialog), GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin)); | |
| 4162 gtk_window_set_destroy_with_parent(GTK_WINDOW(dialog), TRUE); | |
| 4163 | |
| 4164 if (oldval != NULL && oldval[0] != NUL) | |
| 4165 { | |
| 4166 if (output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
| 4167 oldname = string_convert(&output_conv, oldval, NULL); | |
| 4168 else | |
| 4169 oldname = oldval; | |
| 4170 | |
| 4171 /* Annoying bug in GTK (or Pango): if the font name does not include a | |
| 4172 * size, zero is used. Use default point size ten. */ | |
| 4173 if (!vim_isdigit(oldname[STRLEN(oldname) - 1])) | |
| 4174 { | |
| 4175 char_u *p = vim_strnsave(oldname, STRLEN(oldname) + 3); | |
| 4176 | |
| 4177 if (p != NULL) | |
| 4178 { | |
| 4179 STRCPY(p + STRLEN(p), " 10"); | |
| 4180 if (oldname != oldval) | |
| 4181 vim_free(oldname); | |
| 4182 oldname = p; | |
| 4183 } | |
| 4184 } | |
| 4185 | |
| 4186 gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_font_name( | |
| 4187 GTK_FONT_SELECTION_DIALOG(dialog), (const char *)oldname); | |
| 4188 | |
| 4189 if (oldname != oldval) | |
| 100 | 4190 vim_free(oldname); |
| 7 | 4191 } |
| 1959 | 4192 else |
| 4193 gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_font_name( | |
| 4194 GTK_FONT_SELECTION_DIALOG(dialog), DEFAULT_FONT); | |
| 7 | 4195 |
| 4196 response = gtk_dialog_run(GTK_DIALOG(dialog)); | |
| 4197 | |
| 4198 if (response == GTK_RESPONSE_OK) | |
| 4199 { | |
| 4200 char *name; | |
| 4201 | |
| 4202 name = gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_font_name( | |
| 4203 GTK_FONT_SELECTION_DIALOG(dialog)); | |
| 4204 if (name != NULL) | |
| 4205 { | |
| 714 | 4206 char_u *p; |
| 4207 | |
| 4208 /* Apparently some font names include a comma, need to escape | |
| 4209 * that, because in 'guifont' it separates names. */ | |
| 4210 p = vim_strsave_escaped((char_u *)name, (char_u *)","); | |
| 4211 g_free(name); | |
| 840 | 4212 if (p != NULL && input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) |
| 714 | 4213 { |
| 4214 fontname = string_convert(&input_conv, p, NULL); | |
| 4215 vim_free(p); | |
| 4216 } | |
| 7 | 4217 else |
| 714 | 4218 fontname = p; |
| 7 | 4219 } |
| 4220 } | |
| 4221 | |
| 4222 if (response != GTK_RESPONSE_NONE) | |
| 4223 gtk_widget_destroy(dialog); | |
| 4224 | |
| 4225 return fontname; | |
| 4226 } | |
| 4227 | |
| 4228 /* | |
| 4229 * Some monospace fonts don't support a bold weight, and fall back | |
| 4230 * silently to the regular weight. But this is no good since our text | |
| 4231 * drawing function can emulate bold by overstriking. So let's try | |
| 4232 * to detect whether bold weight is actually available and emulate it | |
| 4233 * otherwise. | |
| 4234 * | |
| 4235 * Note that we don't need to check for italic style since Xft can | |
| 4236 * emulate italic on its own, provided you have a proper fontconfig | |
| 4237 * setup. We wouldn't be able to emulate it in Vim anyway. | |
| 4238 */ | |
| 4239 static void | |
| 4240 get_styled_font_variants(void) | |
| 4241 { | |
| 4242 PangoFontDescription *bold_font_desc; | |
| 4243 PangoFont *plain_font; | |
| 4244 PangoFont *bold_font; | |
| 4245 | |
| 4246 gui.font_can_bold = FALSE; | |
| 4247 | |
| 4248 plain_font = pango_context_load_font(gui.text_context, gui.norm_font); | |
| 4249 | |
| 4250 if (plain_font == NULL) | |
| 4251 return; | |
| 4252 | |
| 4253 bold_font_desc = pango_font_description_copy_static(gui.norm_font); | |
| 4254 pango_font_description_set_weight(bold_font_desc, PANGO_WEIGHT_BOLD); | |
| 4255 | |
| 4256 bold_font = pango_context_load_font(gui.text_context, bold_font_desc); | |
| 4257 /* | |
| 4258 * The comparison relies on the unique handle nature of a PangoFont*, | |
| 4259 * i.e. it's assumed that a different PangoFont* won't refer to the | |
| 4260 * same font. Seems to work, and failing here isn't critical anyway. | |
| 4261 */ | |
| 4262 if (bold_font != NULL) | |
| 4263 { | |
| 4264 gui.font_can_bold = (bold_font != plain_font); | |
| 4265 g_object_unref(bold_font); | |
| 4266 } | |
| 4267 | |
| 4268 pango_font_description_free(bold_font_desc); | |
| 4269 g_object_unref(plain_font); | |
| 4270 } | |
| 4271 | |
| 4272 static PangoEngineShape *default_shape_engine = NULL; | |
| 4273 | |
| 4274 /* | |
| 4275 * Create a map from ASCII characters in the range [32,126] to glyphs | |
| 4276 * of the current font. This is used by gui_gtk2_draw_string() to skip | |
| 4277 * the itemize and shaping process for the most common case. | |
| 4278 */ | |
| 4279 static void | |
| 4280 ascii_glyph_table_init(void) | |
| 4281 { | |
| 4282 char_u ascii_chars[128]; | |
| 4283 PangoAttrList *attr_list; | |
| 4284 GList *item_list; | |
| 4285 int i; | |
| 4286 | |
| 4287 if (gui.ascii_glyphs != NULL) | |
| 4288 pango_glyph_string_free(gui.ascii_glyphs); | |
| 4289 if (gui.ascii_font != NULL) | |
| 4290 g_object_unref(gui.ascii_font); | |
| 4291 | |
| 4292 gui.ascii_glyphs = NULL; | |
| 4293 gui.ascii_font = NULL; | |
| 4294 | |
| 4295 /* For safety, fill in question marks for the control characters. */ | |
| 4296 for (i = 0; i < 32; ++i) | |
| 4297 ascii_chars[i] = '?'; | |
| 4298 for (; i < 127; ++i) | |
| 4299 ascii_chars[i] = i; | |
| 4300 ascii_chars[i] = '?'; | |
| 4301 | |
| 4302 attr_list = pango_attr_list_new(); | |
| 4303 item_list = pango_itemize(gui.text_context, (const char *)ascii_chars, | |
| 4304 0, sizeof(ascii_chars), attr_list, NULL); | |
| 4305 | |
| 4306 if (item_list != NULL && item_list->next == NULL) /* play safe */ | |
| 4307 { | |
| 4308 PangoItem *item; | |
| 4309 int width; | |
| 4310 | |
| 4311 item = (PangoItem *)item_list->data; | |
| 4312 width = gui.char_width * PANGO_SCALE; | |
| 4313 | |
| 4314 /* Remember the shape engine used for ASCII. */ | |
| 4315 default_shape_engine = item->analysis.shape_engine; | |
| 4316 | |
| 4317 gui.ascii_font = item->analysis.font; | |
| 4318 g_object_ref(gui.ascii_font); | |
| 4319 | |
| 4320 gui.ascii_glyphs = pango_glyph_string_new(); | |
| 4321 | |
| 4322 pango_shape((const char *)ascii_chars, sizeof(ascii_chars), | |
| 4323 &item->analysis, gui.ascii_glyphs); | |
| 4324 | |
| 4325 g_return_if_fail(gui.ascii_glyphs->num_glyphs == sizeof(ascii_chars)); | |
| 4326 | |
| 4327 for (i = 0; i < gui.ascii_glyphs->num_glyphs; ++i) | |
| 4328 { | |
| 4329 PangoGlyphGeometry *geom; | |
| 4330 | |
| 4331 geom = &gui.ascii_glyphs->glyphs[i].geometry; | |
| 4332 geom->x_offset += MAX(0, width - geom->width) / 2; | |
| 4333 geom->width = width; | |
| 4334 } | |
| 4335 } | |
| 4336 | |
| 4337 g_list_foreach(item_list, (GFunc)&pango_item_free, NULL); | |
| 4338 g_list_free(item_list); | |
| 4339 pango_attr_list_unref(attr_list); | |
| 4340 } | |
| 4341 | |
| 4342 /* | |
| 4343 * Initialize Vim to use the font or fontset with the given name. | |
| 4344 * Return FAIL if the font could not be loaded, OK otherwise. | |
| 4345 */ | |
| 4346 int | |
| 1884 | 4347 gui_mch_init_font(char_u *font_name, int fontset UNUSED) |
| 7 | 4348 { |
| 4349 PangoFontDescription *font_desc; | |
| 4350 PangoLayout *layout; | |
| 4351 int width; | |
| 4352 | |
| 4353 /* If font_name is NULL, this means to use the default, which should | |
| 4354 * be present on all proper Pango/fontconfig installations. */ | |
| 4355 if (font_name == NULL) | |
| 4356 font_name = (char_u *)DEFAULT_FONT; | |
| 4357 | |
| 4358 font_desc = gui_mch_get_font(font_name, FALSE); | |
| 4359 | |
| 4360 if (font_desc == NULL) | |
| 4361 return FAIL; | |
| 4362 | |
| 4363 gui_mch_free_font(gui.norm_font); | |
| 4364 gui.norm_font = font_desc; | |
| 4365 | |
| 4366 pango_context_set_font_description(gui.text_context, font_desc); | |
| 4367 | |
| 4368 layout = pango_layout_new(gui.text_context); | |
| 4369 pango_layout_set_text(layout, "MW", 2); | |
| 4370 pango_layout_get_size(layout, &width, NULL); | |
| 4371 /* | |
| 4372 * Set char_width to half the width obtained from pango_layout_get_size() | |
| 4373 * for CJK fixed_width/bi-width fonts. An unpatched version of Xft leads | |
| 4374 * Pango to use the same width for both non-CJK characters (e.g. Latin | |
| 4375 * letters and numbers) and CJK characters. This results in 's p a c e d | |
| 4376 * o u t' rendering when a CJK 'fixed width' font is used. To work around | |
| 4377 * that, divide the width returned by Pango by 2 if cjk_width is equal to | |
| 4378 * width for CJK fonts. | |
| 4379 * | |
| 4380 * For related bugs, see: | |
| 4381 * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=106618 | |
| 4382 * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=106624 | |
| 4383 * | |
| 4384 * With this, for all four of the following cases, Vim works fine: | |
| 4385 * guifont=CJK_fixed_width_font | |
| 4386 * guifont=Non_CJK_fixed_font | |
| 4387 * guifont=Non_CJK_fixed_font,CJK_Fixed_font | |
| 4388 * guifont=Non_CJK_fixed_font guifontwide=CJK_fixed_font | |
| 4389 */ | |
| 4390 if (is_cjk_font(gui.norm_font)) | |
| 4391 { | |
| 4392 int cjk_width; | |
| 4393 | |
| 4394 /* Measure the text extent of U+4E00 and U+4E8C */ | |
| 4395 pango_layout_set_text(layout, "\344\270\200\344\272\214", -1); | |
| 4396 pango_layout_get_size(layout, &cjk_width, NULL); | |
| 4397 | |
| 4398 if (width == cjk_width) /* Xft not patched */ | |
| 4399 width /= 2; | |
| 4400 } | |
| 4401 g_object_unref(layout); | |
| 4402 | |
| 4403 gui.char_width = (width / 2 + PANGO_SCALE - 1) / PANGO_SCALE; | |
| 4404 | |
| 4405 /* A zero width may cause a crash. Happens for semi-invalid fontsets. */ | |
| 4406 if (gui.char_width <= 0) | |
| 4407 gui.char_width = 8; | |
| 4408 | |
| 445 | 4409 gui_mch_adjust_charheight(); |
| 7 | 4410 |
| 4411 /* Set the fontname, which will be used for information purposes */ | |
| 4412 hl_set_font_name(font_name); | |
| 4413 | |
| 4414 get_styled_font_variants(); | |
| 4415 ascii_glyph_table_init(); | |
| 4416 | |
| 4417 /* Avoid unnecessary overhead if 'guifontwide' is equal to 'guifont'. */ | |
| 4418 if (gui.wide_font != NULL | |
| 4419 && pango_font_description_equal(gui.norm_font, gui.wide_font)) | |
| 4420 { | |
| 4421 pango_font_description_free(gui.wide_font); | |
| 4422 gui.wide_font = NULL; | |
| 4423 } | |
| 4424 | |
| 1986 | 4425 if (gui_mch_maximized()) |
| 4426 { | |
| 4427 /* Update lines and columns in accordance with the new font, keep the | |
| 4428 * window maximized. */ | |
| 3014 | 4429 gui_mch_newfont(); |
| 1986 | 4430 } |
| 4431 else | |
| 4432 { | |
| 4433 /* Preserve the logical dimensions of the screen. */ | |
| 4434 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0); | |
| 4435 } | |
| 7 | 4436 |
| 4437 return OK; | |
| 4438 } | |
| 4439 | |
| 4440 /* | |
| 4441 * Get a reference to the font "name". | |
| 4442 * Return zero for failure. | |
| 4443 */ | |
| 4444 GuiFont | |
| 4445 gui_mch_get_font(char_u *name, int report_error) | |
| 4446 { | |
| 4447 PangoFontDescription *font; | |
| 4448 | |
| 4449 /* can't do this when GUI is not running */ | |
| 4450 if (!gui.in_use || name == NULL) | |
| 4451 return NULL; | |
| 4452 | |
| 4453 if (output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
| 4454 { | |
| 4455 char_u *buf; | |
| 4456 | |
| 4457 buf = string_convert(&output_conv, name, NULL); | |
| 4458 if (buf != NULL) | |
| 4459 { | |
| 4460 font = pango_font_description_from_string((const char *)buf); | |
| 4461 vim_free(buf); | |
| 4462 } | |
| 4463 else | |
| 4464 font = NULL; | |
| 4465 } | |
| 4466 else | |
| 4467 font = pango_font_description_from_string((const char *)name); | |
| 4468 | |
| 4469 if (font != NULL) | |
| 4470 { | |
| 4471 PangoFont *real_font; | |
| 4472 | |
| 4473 /* pango_context_load_font() bails out if no font size is set */ | |
| 4474 if (pango_font_description_get_size(font) <= 0) | |
| 4475 pango_font_description_set_size(font, 10 * PANGO_SCALE); | |
| 4476 | |
| 4477 real_font = pango_context_load_font(gui.text_context, font); | |
| 4478 | |
| 4479 if (real_font == NULL) | |
| 4480 { | |
| 4481 pango_font_description_free(font); | |
| 4482 font = NULL; | |
| 4483 } | |
| 4484 else | |
| 4485 g_object_unref(real_font); | |
| 4486 } | |
| 4487 | |
| 4488 if (font == NULL) | |
| 4489 { | |
| 4490 if (report_error) | |
| 1666 | 4491 EMSG2(_((char *)e_font), name); |
| 7 | 4492 return NULL; |
| 4493 } | |
| 4494 | |
| 4495 return font; | |
| 4496 } | |
| 4497 | |
| 39 | 4498 #if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO) |
| 38 | 4499 /* |
| 4500 * Return the name of font "font" in allocated memory. | |
| 4501 */ | |
| 4502 char_u * | |
| 1884 | 4503 gui_mch_get_fontname(GuiFont font, char_u *name UNUSED) |
| 38 | 4504 { |
| 4505 if (font != NOFONT) | |
| 4506 { | |
| 944 | 4507 char *pangoname = pango_font_description_to_string(font); |
| 4508 | |
| 4509 if (pangoname != NULL) | |
| 38 | 4510 { |
| 944 | 4511 char_u *s = vim_strsave((char_u *)pangoname); |
| 4512 | |
| 4513 g_free(pangoname); | |
| 38 | 4514 return s; |
| 4515 } | |
| 4516 } | |
| 4517 return NULL; | |
| 4518 } | |
| 39 | 4519 #endif |
| 38 | 4520 |
| 7 | 4521 /* |
| 4522 * If a font is not going to be used, free its structure. | |
| 4523 */ | |
| 4524 void | |
| 4525 gui_mch_free_font(GuiFont font) | |
| 4526 { | |
| 4527 if (font != NOFONT) | |
| 4528 pango_font_description_free(font); | |
| 4529 } | |
| 4530 | |
| 4531 /* | |
| 4532 * Return the Pixel value (color) for the given color name. This routine was | |
| 4533 * pretty much taken from example code in the Silicon Graphics OSF/Motif | |
| 4534 * Programmer's Guide. | |
| 4535 * Return INVALCOLOR for error. | |
| 4536 */ | |
| 4537 guicolor_T | |
| 4538 gui_mch_get_color(char_u *name) | |
| 4539 { | |
| 4540 /* A number of colors that some X11 systems don't have */ | |
| 4541 static const char *const vimnames[][2] = | |
| 4542 { | |
| 834 | 4543 {"LightRed", "#FFBBBB"}, |
| 4544 {"LightGreen", "#88FF88"}, | |
| 4545 {"LightMagenta","#FFBBFF"}, | |
| 4546 {"DarkCyan", "#008888"}, | |
| 4547 {"DarkBlue", "#0000BB"}, | |
| 4548 {"DarkRed", "#BB0000"}, | |
| 4549 {"DarkMagenta", "#BB00BB"}, | |
| 4550 {"DarkGrey", "#BBBBBB"}, | |
| 4551 {"DarkYellow", "#BBBB00"}, | |
| 4552 {"Gray10", "#1A1A1A"}, | |
| 4553 {"Grey10", "#1A1A1A"}, | |
| 4554 {"Gray20", "#333333"}, | |
| 4555 {"Grey20", "#333333"}, | |
| 4556 {"Gray30", "#4D4D4D"}, | |
| 4557 {"Grey30", "#4D4D4D"}, | |
| 4558 {"Gray40", "#666666"}, | |
| 4559 {"Grey40", "#666666"}, | |
| 4560 {"Gray50", "#7F7F7F"}, | |
| 4561 {"Grey50", "#7F7F7F"}, | |
| 4562 {"Gray60", "#999999"}, | |
| 4563 {"Grey60", "#999999"}, | |
| 4564 {"Gray70", "#B3B3B3"}, | |
| 4565 {"Grey70", "#B3B3B3"}, | |
| 4566 {"Gray80", "#CCCCCC"}, | |
| 4567 {"Grey80", "#CCCCCC"}, | |
| 4568 {"Gray90", "#E5E5E5"}, | |
| 4569 {"Grey90", "#E5E5E5"}, | |
| 7 | 4570 {NULL, NULL} |
| 4571 }; | |
| 4572 | |
| 4573 if (!gui.in_use) /* can't do this when GUI not running */ | |
| 4574 return INVALCOLOR; | |
| 4575 | |
| 4576 while (name != NULL) | |
| 4577 { | |
| 4578 GdkColor color; | |
| 4579 int parsed; | |
| 4580 int i; | |
| 4581 | |
| 4582 parsed = gdk_color_parse((const char *)name, &color); | |
| 4583 | |
| 4584 if (parsed) | |
| 4585 { | |
| 4586 gdk_colormap_alloc_color(gtk_widget_get_colormap(gui.drawarea), | |
| 4587 &color, FALSE, TRUE); | |
| 4588 return (guicolor_T)color.pixel; | |
| 4589 } | |
| 4590 /* add a few builtin names and try again */ | |
| 4591 for (i = 0; ; ++i) | |
| 4592 { | |
| 4593 if (vimnames[i][0] == NULL) | |
| 4594 { | |
| 4595 name = NULL; | |
| 4596 break; | |
| 4597 } | |
| 4598 if (STRICMP(name, vimnames[i][0]) == 0) | |
| 4599 { | |
| 4600 name = (char_u *)vimnames[i][1]; | |
| 4601 break; | |
| 4602 } | |
| 4603 } | |
| 4604 } | |
| 4605 | |
| 4606 return INVALCOLOR; | |
| 4607 } | |
| 4608 | |
| 4609 /* | |
| 4610 * Set the current text foreground color. | |
| 4611 */ | |
| 4612 void | |
| 4613 gui_mch_set_fg_color(guicolor_T color) | |
| 4614 { | |
| 4615 gui.fgcolor->pixel = (unsigned long)color; | |
| 4616 } | |
| 4617 | |
| 4618 /* | |
| 4619 * Set the current text background color. | |
| 4620 */ | |
| 4621 void | |
| 4622 gui_mch_set_bg_color(guicolor_T color) | |
| 4623 { | |
| 4624 gui.bgcolor->pixel = (unsigned long)color; | |
| 4625 } | |
| 4626 | |
| 207 | 4627 /* |
| 4628 * Set the current text special color. | |
| 4629 */ | |
| 4630 void | |
| 4631 gui_mch_set_sp_color(guicolor_T color) | |
| 4632 { | |
| 4633 gui.spcolor->pixel = (unsigned long)color; | |
| 4634 } | |
| 4635 | |
| 7 | 4636 /* |
| 4637 * Function-like convenience macro for the sake of efficiency. | |
| 4638 */ | |
| 4639 #define INSERT_PANGO_ATTR(Attribute, AttrList, Start, End) \ | |
| 4640 G_STMT_START{ \ | |
| 4641 PangoAttribute *tmp_attr_; \ | |
| 4642 tmp_attr_ = (Attribute); \ | |
| 4643 tmp_attr_->start_index = (Start); \ | |
| 4644 tmp_attr_->end_index = (End); \ | |
| 4645 pango_attr_list_insert((AttrList), tmp_attr_); \ | |
| 4646 }G_STMT_END | |
| 4647 | |
| 4648 static void | |
| 4649 apply_wide_font_attr(char_u *s, int len, PangoAttrList *attr_list) | |
| 4650 { | |
| 4651 char_u *start = NULL; | |
| 4652 char_u *p; | |
| 4653 int uc; | |
| 4654 | |
| 4655 for (p = s; p < s + len; p += utf_byte2len(*p)) | |
| 4656 { | |
| 4657 uc = utf_ptr2char(p); | |
| 4658 | |
| 4659 if (start == NULL) | |
| 4660 { | |
| 4661 if (uc >= 0x80 && utf_char2cells(uc) == 2) | |
| 4662 start = p; | |
| 4663 } | |
| 4664 else if (uc < 0x80 /* optimization shortcut */ | |
| 4665 || (utf_char2cells(uc) != 2 && !utf_iscomposing(uc))) | |
| 4666 { | |
| 4667 INSERT_PANGO_ATTR(pango_attr_font_desc_new(gui.wide_font), | |
| 4668 attr_list, start - s, p - s); | |
| 4669 start = NULL; | |
| 4670 } | |
| 4671 } | |
| 4672 | |
| 4673 if (start != NULL) | |
| 4674 INSERT_PANGO_ATTR(pango_attr_font_desc_new(gui.wide_font), | |
| 4675 attr_list, start - s, len); | |
| 4676 } | |
| 4677 | |
| 4678 static int | |
| 4679 count_cluster_cells(char_u *s, PangoItem *item, | |
| 4680 PangoGlyphString* glyphs, int i, | |
| 4681 int *cluster_width, | |
| 4682 int *last_glyph_rbearing) | |
| 4683 { | |
| 4684 char_u *p; | |
| 4685 int next; /* glyph start index of next cluster */ | |
| 4686 int start, end; /* string segment of current cluster */ | |
| 4687 int width; /* real cluster width in Pango units */ | |
| 4688 int uc; | |
| 4689 int cellcount = 0; | |
| 4690 | |
| 4691 width = glyphs->glyphs[i].geometry.width; | |
| 4692 | |
| 4693 for (next = i + 1; next < glyphs->num_glyphs; ++next) | |
| 4694 { | |
| 4695 if (glyphs->glyphs[next].attr.is_cluster_start) | |
| 4696 break; | |
| 4697 else if (glyphs->glyphs[next].geometry.width > width) | |
| 4698 width = glyphs->glyphs[next].geometry.width; | |
| 4699 } | |
| 4700 | |
| 4701 start = item->offset + glyphs->log_clusters[i]; | |
| 4702 end = item->offset + ((next < glyphs->num_glyphs) ? | |
| 4703 glyphs->log_clusters[next] : item->length); | |
| 4704 | |
| 4705 for (p = s + start; p < s + end; p += utf_byte2len(*p)) | |
| 4706 { | |
| 4707 uc = utf_ptr2char(p); | |
| 4708 if (uc < 0x80) | |
| 4709 ++cellcount; | |
| 4710 else if (!utf_iscomposing(uc)) | |
| 4711 cellcount += utf_char2cells(uc); | |
| 4712 } | |
| 4713 | |
| 4714 if (last_glyph_rbearing != NULL | |
| 4715 && cellcount > 0 && next == glyphs->num_glyphs) | |
| 4716 { | |
| 4717 PangoRectangle ink_rect; | |
| 4718 /* | |
| 4719 * If a certain combining mark had to be taken from a non-monospace | |
| 4720 * font, we have to compensate manually by adapting x_offset according | |
| 4721 * to the ink extents of the previous glyph. | |
| 4722 */ | |
| 4723 pango_font_get_glyph_extents(item->analysis.font, | |
| 4724 glyphs->glyphs[i].glyph, | |
| 4725 &ink_rect, NULL); | |
| 4726 | |
| 4727 if (PANGO_RBEARING(ink_rect) > 0) | |
| 4728 *last_glyph_rbearing = PANGO_RBEARING(ink_rect); | |
| 4729 } | |
| 4730 | |
| 4731 if (cellcount > 0) | |
| 4732 *cluster_width = width; | |
| 4733 | |
| 4734 return cellcount; | |
| 4735 } | |
| 4736 | |
| 4737 /* | |
| 4738 * If there are only combining characters in the cluster, we cannot just | |
| 4739 * change the width of the previous glyph since there is none. Therefore | |
| 4740 * some guesswork is needed. | |
| 4741 * | |
| 4742 * If ink_rect.x is negative Pango apparently has taken care of the composing | |
| 4743 * by itself. Actually setting x_offset = 0 should be sufficient then, but due | |
| 4744 * to problems with composing from different fonts we still need to fine-tune | |
|
2278
0b3be97064e5
Various small fixes from Dominique Pelle.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2275
diff
changeset
|
4745 * x_offset to avoid ugliness. |
| 7 | 4746 * |
| 4747 * If ink_rect.x is not negative, force overstriking by pointing x_offset to | |
| 4748 * the position of the previous glyph. Apparently this happens only with old | |
| 4749 * X fonts which don't provide the special combining information needed by | |
| 4750 * Pango. | |
| 4751 */ | |
| 4752 static void | |
| 4753 setup_zero_width_cluster(PangoItem *item, PangoGlyphInfo *glyph, | |
| 4754 int last_cellcount, int last_cluster_width, | |
| 4755 int last_glyph_rbearing) | |
| 4756 { | |
| 4757 PangoRectangle ink_rect; | |
| 4758 PangoRectangle logical_rect; | |
| 4759 int width; | |
| 4760 | |
| 4761 width = last_cellcount * gui.char_width * PANGO_SCALE; | |
| 4762 glyph->geometry.x_offset = -width + MAX(0, width - last_cluster_width) / 2; | |
| 4763 glyph->geometry.width = 0; | |
| 4764 | |
| 4765 pango_font_get_glyph_extents(item->analysis.font, | |
| 4766 glyph->glyph, | |
| 4767 &ink_rect, &logical_rect); | |
| 4768 if (ink_rect.x < 0) | |
| 4769 { | |
| 4770 glyph->geometry.x_offset += last_glyph_rbearing; | |
| 4771 glyph->geometry.y_offset = logical_rect.height | |
| 4772 - (gui.char_height - p_linespace) * PANGO_SCALE; | |
| 4773 } | |
|
2507
2070b63605a7
Fix: with newer GTK versions accented characters were drawn too much to the
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2409
diff
changeset
|
4774 else |
|
2070b63605a7
Fix: with newer GTK versions accented characters were drawn too much to the
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2409
diff
changeset
|
4775 /* If the accent width is smaller than the cluster width, position it |
|
2070b63605a7
Fix: with newer GTK versions accented characters were drawn too much to the
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2409
diff
changeset
|
4776 * in the middle. */ |
|
2070b63605a7
Fix: with newer GTK versions accented characters were drawn too much to the
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2409
diff
changeset
|
4777 glyph->geometry.x_offset = -width + MAX(0, width - ink_rect.width) / 2; |
| 7 | 4778 } |
| 4779 | |
| 4780 static void | |
| 4781 draw_glyph_string(int row, int col, int num_cells, int flags, | |
| 4782 PangoFont *font, PangoGlyphString *glyphs) | |
| 4783 { | |
| 4784 if (!(flags & DRAW_TRANSP)) | |
| 4785 { | |
| 4786 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.bgcolor); | |
| 4787 | |
| 4788 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, | |
| 4789 gui.text_gc, | |
| 4790 TRUE, | |
| 4791 FILL_X(col), | |
| 4792 FILL_Y(row), | |
| 4793 num_cells * gui.char_width, | |
| 4794 gui.char_height); | |
| 4795 } | |
| 4796 | |
| 4797 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor); | |
| 4798 | |
| 4799 gdk_draw_glyphs(gui.drawarea->window, | |
| 4800 gui.text_gc, | |
| 4801 font, | |
| 4802 TEXT_X(col), | |
| 4803 TEXT_Y(row), | |
| 4804 glyphs); | |
| 4805 | |
| 4806 /* redraw the contents with an offset of 1 to emulate bold */ | |
| 4807 if ((flags & DRAW_BOLD) && !gui.font_can_bold) | |
| 4808 gdk_draw_glyphs(gui.drawarea->window, | |
| 4809 gui.text_gc, | |
| 4810 font, | |
| 4811 TEXT_X(col) + 1, | |
| 4812 TEXT_Y(row), | |
| 4813 glyphs); | |
| 4814 } | |
| 4815 | |
| 207 | 4816 /* |
| 4817 * Draw underline and undercurl at the bottom of the character cell. | |
| 4818 */ | |
| 4819 static void | |
| 4820 draw_under(int flags, int row, int col, int cells) | |
| 4821 { | |
| 4822 int i; | |
| 4823 int offset; | |
| 1884 | 4824 static const int val[8] = {1, 0, 0, 0, 1, 2, 2, 2 }; |
| 207 | 4825 int y = FILL_Y(row + 1) - 1; |
| 4826 | |
| 4827 /* Undercurl: draw curl at the bottom of the character cell. */ | |
| 4828 if (flags & DRAW_UNDERC) | |
| 4829 { | |
| 4830 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.spcolor); | |
| 4831 for (i = FILL_X(col); i < FILL_X(col + cells); ++i) | |
| 4832 { | |
| 4833 offset = val[i % 8]; | |
| 4834 gdk_draw_point(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc, i, y - offset); | |
| 4835 } | |
| 4836 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor); | |
| 4837 } | |
| 4838 | |
| 4839 /* Underline: draw a line at the bottom of the character cell. */ | |
| 4840 if (flags & DRAW_UNDERL) | |
| 4841 { | |
| 4842 /* When p_linespace is 0, overwrite the bottom row of pixels. | |
| 4843 * Otherwise put the line just below the character. */ | |
| 4844 if (p_linespace > 1) | |
| 4845 y -= p_linespace - 1; | |
| 4846 gdk_draw_line(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc, | |
| 4847 FILL_X(col), y, | |
| 4848 FILL_X(col + cells) - 1, y); | |
| 4849 } | |
| 4850 } | |
| 4851 | |
| 7 | 4852 int |
| 4853 gui_gtk2_draw_string(int row, int col, char_u *s, int len, int flags) | |
| 4854 { | |
| 4855 GdkRectangle area; /* area for clip mask */ | |
| 4856 PangoGlyphString *glyphs; /* glyphs of current item */ | |
| 4857 int column_offset = 0; /* column offset in cells */ | |
| 4858 int i; | |
| 4859 char_u *conv_buf = NULL; /* result of UTF-8 conversion */ | |
| 4860 char_u *new_conv_buf; | |
| 4861 int convlen; | |
| 4862 char_u *sp, *bp; | |
| 4863 int plen; | |
| 4864 | |
| 4865 if (gui.text_context == NULL || gui.drawarea->window == NULL) | |
| 4866 return len; | |
| 4867 | |
| 4868 if (output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
| 4869 { | |
| 4870 /* | |
| 4871 * Convert characters from 'encoding' to 'termencoding', which is set | |
| 4872 * to UTF-8 by gui_mch_init(). did_set_string_option() in option.c | |
| 4873 * prohibits changing this to something else than UTF-8 if the GUI is | |
| 4874 * in use. | |
| 4875 */ | |
| 4876 convlen = len; | |
| 4877 conv_buf = string_convert(&output_conv, s, &convlen); | |
| 4878 g_return_val_if_fail(conv_buf != NULL, len); | |
| 4879 | |
| 4880 /* Correct for differences in char width: some chars are | |
| 4881 * double-wide in 'encoding' but single-wide in utf-8. Add a space to | |
| 4882 * compensate for that. */ | |
| 4883 for (sp = s, bp = conv_buf; sp < s + len && bp < conv_buf + convlen; ) | |
| 4884 { | |
| 474 | 4885 plen = utf_ptr2len(bp); |
| 7 | 4886 if ((*mb_ptr2cells)(sp) == 2 && utf_ptr2cells(bp) == 1) |
| 4887 { | |
| 4888 new_conv_buf = alloc(convlen + 2); | |
| 4889 if (new_conv_buf == NULL) | |
| 4890 return len; | |
| 4891 plen += bp - conv_buf; | |
| 4892 mch_memmove(new_conv_buf, conv_buf, plen); | |
| 4893 new_conv_buf[plen] = ' '; | |
| 4894 mch_memmove(new_conv_buf + plen + 1, conv_buf + plen, | |
| 4895 convlen - plen + 1); | |
| 4896 vim_free(conv_buf); | |
| 4897 conv_buf = new_conv_buf; | |
| 4898 ++convlen; | |
| 4899 bp = conv_buf + plen; | |
| 4900 plen = 1; | |
| 4901 } | |
| 474 | 4902 sp += (*mb_ptr2len)(sp); |
| 7 | 4903 bp += plen; |
| 4904 } | |
| 4905 s = conv_buf; | |
| 4906 len = convlen; | |
| 4907 } | |
| 4908 | |
| 4909 /* | |
| 4910 * Restrict all drawing to the current screen line in order to prevent | |
| 4911 * fuzzy font lookups from messing up the screen. | |
| 4912 */ | |
| 4913 area.x = gui.border_offset; | |
| 4914 area.y = FILL_Y(row); | |
| 4915 area.width = gui.num_cols * gui.char_width; | |
| 4916 area.height = gui.char_height; | |
| 4917 | |
| 4918 gdk_gc_set_clip_origin(gui.text_gc, 0, 0); | |
| 4919 gdk_gc_set_clip_rectangle(gui.text_gc, &area); | |
| 4920 | |
| 4921 glyphs = pango_glyph_string_new(); | |
| 4922 | |
| 4923 /* | |
| 4924 * Optimization hack: If possible, skip the itemize and shaping process | |
| 4925 * for pure ASCII strings. This optimization is particularly effective | |
| 4926 * because Vim draws space characters to clear parts of the screen. | |
| 4927 */ | |
| 4928 if (!(flags & DRAW_ITALIC) | |
| 4929 && !((flags & DRAW_BOLD) && gui.font_can_bold) | |
| 4930 && gui.ascii_glyphs != NULL) | |
| 4931 { | |
| 4932 char_u *p; | |
| 4933 | |
| 4934 for (p = s; p < s + len; ++p) | |
| 4935 if (*p & 0x80) | |
| 4936 goto not_ascii; | |
| 4937 | |
| 4938 pango_glyph_string_set_size(glyphs, len); | |
| 4939 | |
| 4940 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i) | |
| 4941 { | |
| 4942 glyphs->glyphs[i] = gui.ascii_glyphs->glyphs[s[i]]; | |
| 4943 glyphs->log_clusters[i] = i; | |
| 4944 } | |
| 4945 | |
| 4946 draw_glyph_string(row, col, len, flags, gui.ascii_font, glyphs); | |
| 4947 | |
| 4948 column_offset = len; | |
| 4949 } | |
| 4950 else | |
| 4951 not_ascii: | |
| 4952 { | |
| 4953 PangoAttrList *attr_list; | |
| 4954 GList *item_list; | |
| 4955 int cluster_width; | |
| 4956 int last_glyph_rbearing; | |
| 4957 int cells = 0; /* cells occupied by current cluster */ | |
| 4958 | |
| 26 | 4959 /* Safety check: pango crashes when invoked with invalid utf-8 |
| 4960 * characters. */ | |
| 4961 if (!utf_valid_string(s, s + len)) | |
| 4962 { | |
| 4963 column_offset = len; | |
| 4964 goto skipitall; | |
| 4965 } | |
| 4966 | |
| 7 | 4967 /* original width of the current cluster */ |
| 4968 cluster_width = PANGO_SCALE * gui.char_width; | |
| 4969 | |
| 4970 /* right bearing of the last non-composing glyph */ | |
| 4971 last_glyph_rbearing = PANGO_SCALE * gui.char_width; | |
| 4972 | |
| 4973 attr_list = pango_attr_list_new(); | |
| 4974 | |
| 4975 /* If 'guifontwide' is set then use that for double-width characters. | |
| 4976 * Otherwise just go with 'guifont' and let Pango do its thing. */ | |
| 4977 if (gui.wide_font != NULL) | |
| 4978 apply_wide_font_attr(s, len, attr_list); | |
| 4979 | |
| 4980 if ((flags & DRAW_BOLD) && gui.font_can_bold) | |
| 4981 INSERT_PANGO_ATTR(pango_attr_weight_new(PANGO_WEIGHT_BOLD), | |
| 4982 attr_list, 0, len); | |
| 4983 if (flags & DRAW_ITALIC) | |
| 4984 INSERT_PANGO_ATTR(pango_attr_style_new(PANGO_STYLE_ITALIC), | |
| 4985 attr_list, 0, len); | |
| 4986 /* | |
| 4987 * Break the text into segments with consistent directional level | |
| 4988 * and shaping engine. Pure Latin text needs only a single segment, | |
| 4989 * so there's no need to worry about the loop's efficiency. Better | |
| 4990 * try to optimize elsewhere, e.g. reducing exposes and stuff :) | |
| 4991 */ | |
| 4992 item_list = pango_itemize(gui.text_context, | |
| 4993 (const char *)s, 0, len, attr_list, NULL); | |
| 4994 | |
| 4995 while (item_list != NULL) | |
| 4996 { | |
| 4997 PangoItem *item; | |
| 4998 int item_cells = 0; /* item length in cells */ | |
| 4999 | |
| 5000 item = (PangoItem *)item_list->data; | |
| 5001 item_list = g_list_delete_link(item_list, item_list); | |
| 5002 /* | |
| 5003 * Increment the bidirectional embedding level by 1 if it is not | |
| 5004 * even. An odd number means the output will be RTL, but we don't | |
| 5005 * want that since Vim handles right-to-left text on its own. It | |
| 5006 * would probably be sufficient to just set level = 0, but you can | |
| 5007 * never know :) | |
| 5008 * | |
| 5009 * Unfortunately we can't take advantage of Pango's ability to | |
| 5010 * render both LTR and RTL at the same time. In order to support | |
| 5011 * that, Vim's main screen engine would have to make use of Pango | |
| 5012 * functionality. | |
| 5013 */ | |
| 5014 item->analysis.level = (item->analysis.level + 1) & (~1U); | |
| 5015 | |
| 5016 /* HACK: Overrule the shape engine, we don't want shaping to be | |
| 5017 * done, because drawing the cursor would change the display. */ | |
| 5018 item->analysis.shape_engine = default_shape_engine; | |
| 5019 | |
| 5020 pango_shape((const char *)s + item->offset, item->length, | |
| 5021 &item->analysis, glyphs); | |
| 5022 /* | |
| 5023 * Fixed-width hack: iterate over the array and assign a fixed | |
| 5024 * width to each glyph, thus overriding the choice made by the | |
| 5025 * shaping engine. We use utf_char2cells() to determine the | |
| 5026 * number of cells needed. | |
| 5027 * | |
| 5028 * Also perform all kind of dark magic to get composing | |
| 5029 * characters right (and pretty too of course). | |
| 5030 */ | |
| 5031 for (i = 0; i < glyphs->num_glyphs; ++i) | |
| 5032 { | |
| 5033 PangoGlyphInfo *glyph; | |
| 5034 | |
| 5035 glyph = &glyphs->glyphs[i]; | |
| 5036 | |
| 5037 if (glyph->attr.is_cluster_start) | |
| 5038 { | |
| 5039 int cellcount; | |
| 5040 | |
| 5041 cellcount = count_cluster_cells( | |
| 5042 s, item, glyphs, i, &cluster_width, | |
| 5043 (item_list != NULL) ? &last_glyph_rbearing : NULL); | |
| 5044 | |
| 5045 if (cellcount > 0) | |
| 5046 { | |
| 5047 int width; | |
| 5048 | |
| 5049 width = cellcount * gui.char_width * PANGO_SCALE; | |
| 5050 glyph->geometry.x_offset += | |
| 5051 MAX(0, width - cluster_width) / 2; | |
| 5052 glyph->geometry.width = width; | |
| 5053 } | |
| 5054 else | |
| 5055 { | |
| 5056 /* If there are only combining characters in the | |
| 5057 * cluster, we cannot just change the width of the | |
| 5058 * previous glyph since there is none. Therefore | |
| 5059 * some guesswork is needed. */ | |
| 5060 setup_zero_width_cluster(item, glyph, cells, | |
| 5061 cluster_width, | |
| 5062 last_glyph_rbearing); | |
| 5063 } | |
| 5064 | |
| 5065 item_cells += cellcount; | |
| 5066 cells = cellcount; | |
| 5067 } | |
| 5068 else if (i > 0) | |
| 5069 { | |
| 5070 int width; | |
| 5071 | |
| 5072 /* There is a previous glyph, so we deal with combining | |
|
2507
2070b63605a7
Fix: with newer GTK versions accented characters were drawn too much to the
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2409
diff
changeset
|
5073 * characters the canonical way. |
|
2517
fe5709686d05
Improve positioning of combining characters in GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2507
diff
changeset
|
5074 * In some circumstances Pango uses a positive x_offset, |
|
fe5709686d05
Improve positioning of combining characters in GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2507
diff
changeset
|
5075 * then use the width of the previous glyph for this one |
|
fe5709686d05
Improve positioning of combining characters in GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2507
diff
changeset
|
5076 * and set the previous width to zero. |
|
fe5709686d05
Improve positioning of combining characters in GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2507
diff
changeset
|
5077 * Otherwise we get a negative x_offset, Pango has already |
|
fe5709686d05
Improve positioning of combining characters in GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2507
diff
changeset
|
5078 * positioned the combining char, keep the widths as they |
|
fe5709686d05
Improve positioning of combining characters in GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2507
diff
changeset
|
5079 * are. |
|
2507
2070b63605a7
Fix: with newer GTK versions accented characters were drawn too much to the
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2409
diff
changeset
|
5080 * For both adjust the x_offset to position the glyph in |
|
2517
fe5709686d05
Improve positioning of combining characters in GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2507
diff
changeset
|
5081 * the middle. */ |
|
2507
2070b63605a7
Fix: with newer GTK versions accented characters were drawn too much to the
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2409
diff
changeset
|
5082 if (glyph->geometry.x_offset >= 0) |
|
2517
fe5709686d05
Improve positioning of combining characters in GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2507
diff
changeset
|
5083 { |
|
fe5709686d05
Improve positioning of combining characters in GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2507
diff
changeset
|
5084 glyphs->glyphs[i].geometry.width = |
|
fe5709686d05
Improve positioning of combining characters in GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2507
diff
changeset
|
5085 glyphs->glyphs[i - 1].geometry.width; |
|
2507
2070b63605a7
Fix: with newer GTK versions accented characters were drawn too much to the
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2409
diff
changeset
|
5086 glyphs->glyphs[i - 1].geometry.width = 0; |
|
2517
fe5709686d05
Improve positioning of combining characters in GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2507
diff
changeset
|
5087 } |
| 7 | 5088 width = cells * gui.char_width * PANGO_SCALE; |
| 5089 glyph->geometry.x_offset += | |
| 5090 MAX(0, width - cluster_width) / 2; | |
| 5091 } | |
| 5092 else /* i == 0 "cannot happen" */ | |
| 5093 { | |
| 5094 glyph->geometry.width = 0; | |
| 5095 } | |
| 5096 } | |
| 5097 | |
| 5098 /*** Aaaaand action! ***/ | |
| 5099 draw_glyph_string(row, col + column_offset, item_cells, | |
| 5100 flags, item->analysis.font, glyphs); | |
| 5101 | |
| 5102 pango_item_free(item); | |
| 5103 | |
| 5104 column_offset += item_cells; | |
| 5105 } | |
| 5106 | |
| 5107 pango_attr_list_unref(attr_list); | |
| 5108 } | |
| 5109 | |
| 26 | 5110 skipitall: |
| 207 | 5111 /* Draw underline and undercurl. */ |
| 5112 draw_under(flags, row, col, column_offset); | |
| 7 | 5113 |
| 5114 pango_glyph_string_free(glyphs); | |
| 5115 vim_free(conv_buf); | |
| 5116 | |
| 5117 gdk_gc_set_clip_rectangle(gui.text_gc, NULL); | |
| 5118 | |
| 5119 return column_offset; | |
| 5120 } | |
| 5121 | |
| 5122 /* | |
| 5123 * Return OK if the key with the termcap name "name" is supported. | |
| 5124 */ | |
| 5125 int | |
| 5126 gui_mch_haskey(char_u *name) | |
| 5127 { | |
| 5128 int i; | |
| 5129 | |
| 5130 for (i = 0; special_keys[i].key_sym != 0; i++) | |
| 5131 if (name[0] == special_keys[i].code0 | |
| 5132 && name[1] == special_keys[i].code1) | |
| 5133 return OK; | |
| 5134 return FAIL; | |
| 5135 } | |
| 5136 | |
| 5137 #if defined(FEAT_TITLE) \ | |
| 5138 || defined(PROTO) | |
| 5139 /* | |
| 5140 * Return the text window-id and display. Only required for X-based GUI's | |
| 5141 */ | |
| 5142 int | |
| 5143 gui_get_x11_windis(Window *win, Display **dis) | |
| 5144 { | |
| 5145 if (gui.mainwin != NULL && gui.mainwin->window != NULL) | |
| 5146 { | |
| 5147 *dis = GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window); | |
| 5148 *win = GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window); | |
| 5149 return OK; | |
| 5150 } | |
| 5151 | |
| 5152 *dis = NULL; | |
| 5153 *win = 0; | |
| 5154 return FAIL; | |
| 5155 } | |
| 5156 #endif | |
| 5157 | |
| 5158 #if defined(FEAT_CLIENTSERVER) \ | |
| 5159 || (defined(FEAT_X11) && defined(FEAT_CLIPBOARD)) || defined(PROTO) | |
| 5160 | |
| 5161 Display * | |
| 5162 gui_mch_get_display(void) | |
| 5163 { | |
| 5164 if (gui.mainwin != NULL && gui.mainwin->window != NULL) | |
| 5165 return GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window); | |
| 5166 else | |
| 5167 return NULL; | |
| 5168 } | |
| 5169 #endif | |
| 5170 | |
| 5171 void | |
| 5172 gui_mch_beep(void) | |
| 5173 { | |
| 5174 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD | |
| 5175 GdkDisplay *display; | |
| 5176 | |
| 5177 if (gui.mainwin != NULL && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(gui.mainwin)) | |
| 5178 display = gtk_widget_get_display(gui.mainwin); | |
| 5179 else | |
| 5180 display = gdk_display_get_default(); | |
| 5181 | |
| 5182 if (display != NULL) | |
| 5183 gdk_display_beep(display); | |
| 5184 #else | |
| 5185 gdk_beep(); | |
| 5186 #endif | |
| 5187 } | |
| 5188 | |
| 5189 void | |
| 5190 gui_mch_flash(int msec) | |
| 5191 { | |
| 5192 GdkGCValues values; | |
| 5193 GdkGC *invert_gc; | |
| 5194 | |
| 5195 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL) | |
| 5196 return; | |
| 5197 | |
| 5198 values.foreground.pixel = gui.norm_pixel ^ gui.back_pixel; | |
| 5199 values.background.pixel = gui.norm_pixel ^ gui.back_pixel; | |
| 5200 values.function = GDK_XOR; | |
| 5201 invert_gc = gdk_gc_new_with_values(gui.drawarea->window, | |
| 5202 &values, | |
| 5203 GDK_GC_FOREGROUND | | |
| 5204 GDK_GC_BACKGROUND | | |
| 5205 GDK_GC_FUNCTION); | |
| 5206 gdk_gc_set_exposures(invert_gc, | |
| 5207 gui.visibility != GDK_VISIBILITY_UNOBSCURED); | |
| 5208 /* | |
| 5209 * Do a visual beep by changing back and forth in some undetermined way, | |
| 5210 * the foreground and background colors. This is due to the fact that | |
| 5211 * there can't be really any prediction about the effects of XOR on | |
| 5212 * arbitrary X11 servers. However this seems to be enough for what we | |
| 5213 * intend it to do. | |
| 5214 */ | |
| 5215 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, invert_gc, | |
| 5216 TRUE, | |
| 5217 0, 0, | |
| 5218 FILL_X((int)Columns) + gui.border_offset, | |
| 5219 FILL_Y((int)Rows) + gui.border_offset); | |
| 5220 | |
| 5221 gui_mch_flush(); | |
| 5222 ui_delay((long)msec, TRUE); /* wait so many msec */ | |
| 5223 | |
| 5224 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, invert_gc, | |
| 5225 TRUE, | |
| 5226 0, 0, | |
| 5227 FILL_X((int)Columns) + gui.border_offset, | |
| 5228 FILL_Y((int)Rows) + gui.border_offset); | |
| 5229 | |
| 5230 gdk_gc_destroy(invert_gc); | |
| 5231 } | |
| 5232 | |
| 5233 /* | |
| 5234 * Invert a rectangle from row r, column c, for nr rows and nc columns. | |
| 5235 */ | |
| 5236 void | |
| 5237 gui_mch_invert_rectangle(int r, int c, int nr, int nc) | |
| 5238 { | |
| 5239 GdkGCValues values; | |
| 5240 GdkGC *invert_gc; | |
| 5241 | |
| 5242 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL) | |
| 5243 return; | |
| 5244 | |
| 944 | 5245 values.foreground.pixel = gui.norm_pixel ^ gui.back_pixel; |
| 5246 values.background.pixel = gui.norm_pixel ^ gui.back_pixel; | |
| 7 | 5247 values.function = GDK_XOR; |
| 5248 invert_gc = gdk_gc_new_with_values(gui.drawarea->window, | |
| 5249 &values, | |
| 5250 GDK_GC_FOREGROUND | | |
| 5251 GDK_GC_BACKGROUND | | |
| 5252 GDK_GC_FUNCTION); | |
| 944 | 5253 gdk_gc_set_exposures(invert_gc, gui.visibility != |
| 5254 GDK_VISIBILITY_UNOBSCURED); | |
| 7 | 5255 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, invert_gc, |
| 5256 TRUE, | |
| 5257 FILL_X(c), FILL_Y(r), | |
| 5258 (nc) * gui.char_width, (nr) * gui.char_height); | |
| 5259 gdk_gc_destroy(invert_gc); | |
| 5260 } | |
| 5261 | |
| 5262 /* | |
| 5263 * Iconify the GUI window. | |
| 5264 */ | |
| 5265 void | |
| 5266 gui_mch_iconify(void) | |
| 5267 { | |
| 5268 gtk_window_iconify(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin)); | |
| 5269 } | |
| 5270 | |
| 5271 #if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO) | |
| 5272 /* | |
| 5273 * Bring the Vim window to the foreground. | |
| 5274 */ | |
| 5275 void | |
| 5276 gui_mch_set_foreground(void) | |
| 5277 { | |
| 5278 gtk_window_present(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin)); | |
| 5279 } | |
| 5280 #endif | |
| 5281 | |
| 5282 /* | |
| 5283 * Draw a cursor without focus. | |
| 5284 */ | |
| 5285 void | |
| 5286 gui_mch_draw_hollow_cursor(guicolor_T color) | |
| 5287 { | |
| 5288 int i = 1; | |
| 5289 | |
| 5290 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL) | |
| 5291 return; | |
| 5292 | |
| 5293 gui_mch_set_fg_color(color); | |
| 5294 | |
| 5295 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor); | |
| 5296 if (mb_lefthalve(gui.row, gui.col)) | |
| 5297 i = 2; | |
| 5298 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc, | |
| 5299 FALSE, | |
| 5300 FILL_X(gui.col), FILL_Y(gui.row), | |
| 5301 i * gui.char_width - 1, gui.char_height - 1); | |
| 5302 } | |
| 5303 | |
| 5304 /* | |
| 5305 * Draw part of a cursor, "w" pixels wide, and "h" pixels high, using | |
| 5306 * color "color". | |
| 5307 */ | |
| 5308 void | |
| 5309 gui_mch_draw_part_cursor(int w, int h, guicolor_T color) | |
| 5310 { | |
| 5311 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL) | |
| 5312 return; | |
| 5313 | |
| 5314 gui_mch_set_fg_color(color); | |
| 5315 | |
| 5316 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor); | |
| 5317 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc, | |
| 5318 TRUE, | |
| 5319 #ifdef FEAT_RIGHTLEFT | |
| 5320 /* vertical line should be on the right of current point */ | |
| 5321 CURSOR_BAR_RIGHT ? FILL_X(gui.col + 1) - w : | |
| 5322 #endif | |
| 5323 FILL_X(gui.col), | |
| 5324 FILL_Y(gui.row) + gui.char_height - h, | |
| 5325 w, h); | |
| 5326 } | |
| 5327 | |
| 5328 | |
| 5329 /* | |
| 5330 * Catch up with any queued X11 events. This may put keyboard input into the | |
| 5331 * input buffer, call resize call-backs, trigger timers etc. If there is | |
| 5332 * nothing in the X11 event queue (& no timers pending), then we return | |
| 5333 * immediately. | |
| 5334 */ | |
| 5335 void | |
| 5336 gui_mch_update(void) | |
| 5337 { | |
|
2301
6f63294a1781
Avoid use of the GTK mail_loop() so that the GtkFileChooser can be used.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2278
diff
changeset
|
5338 while (g_main_context_pending(NULL) && !vim_is_input_buf_full()) |
|
6f63294a1781
Avoid use of the GTK mail_loop() so that the GtkFileChooser can be used.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2278
diff
changeset
|
5339 g_main_context_iteration(NULL, TRUE); |
| 7 | 5340 } |
| 5341 | |
| 5342 static gint | |
| 5343 input_timer_cb(gpointer data) | |
| 5344 { | |
| 5345 int *timed_out = (int *) data; | |
| 5346 | |
| 1226 | 5347 /* Just inform the caller about the occurrence of it */ |
| 7 | 5348 *timed_out = TRUE; |
| 5349 | |
| 5350 return FALSE; /* don't happen again */ | |
| 5351 } | |
| 5352 | |
| 5353 #ifdef FEAT_SNIFF | |
| 5354 /* | |
| 5355 * Callback function, used when data is available on the SNiFF connection. | |
| 5356 */ | |
| 5357 static void | |
| 5358 sniff_request_cb( | |
| 5359 gpointer data, | |
| 5360 gint source_fd, | |
| 5361 GdkInputCondition condition) | |
| 5362 { | |
| 5363 static char_u bytes[3] = {CSI, (int)KS_EXTRA, (int)KE_SNIFF}; | |
| 5364 | |
| 5365 add_to_input_buf(bytes, 3); | |
| 5366 } | |
| 5367 #endif | |
| 5368 | |
| 5369 /* | |
| 5370 * GUI input routine called by gui_wait_for_chars(). Waits for a character | |
| 5371 * from the keyboard. | |
| 5372 * wtime == -1 Wait forever. | |
| 5373 * wtime == 0 This should never happen. | |
| 5374 * wtime > 0 Wait wtime milliseconds for a character. | |
| 5375 * Returns OK if a character was found to be available within the given time, | |
| 5376 * or FAIL otherwise. | |
| 5377 */ | |
| 5378 int | |
| 5379 gui_mch_wait_for_chars(long wtime) | |
| 5380 { | |
| 5381 int focus; | |
| 5382 guint timer; | |
| 5383 static int timed_out; | |
| 5384 #ifdef FEAT_SNIFF | |
| 5385 static int sniff_on = 0; | |
| 5386 static gint sniff_input_id = 0; | |
| 5387 #endif | |
| 5388 | |
| 5389 #ifdef FEAT_SNIFF | |
| 5390 if (sniff_on && !want_sniff_request) | |
| 5391 { | |
| 5392 if (sniff_input_id) | |
| 5393 gdk_input_remove(sniff_input_id); | |
| 5394 sniff_on = 0; | |
| 5395 } | |
| 5396 else if (!sniff_on && want_sniff_request) | |
| 5397 { | |
| 5398 /* Add fd_from_sniff to watch for available data in main loop. */ | |
| 5399 sniff_input_id = gdk_input_add(fd_from_sniff, | |
| 5400 GDK_INPUT_READ, sniff_request_cb, NULL); | |
| 5401 sniff_on = 1; | |
| 5402 } | |
| 5403 #endif | |
| 5404 | |
| 5405 timed_out = FALSE; | |
| 5406 | |
| 5407 /* this timeout makes sure that we will return if no characters arrived in | |
| 5408 * time */ | |
| 5409 | |
| 5410 if (wtime > 0) | |
| 5411 timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)wtime, input_timer_cb, &timed_out); | |
| 5412 else | |
| 5413 timer = 0; | |
| 5414 | |
| 5415 focus = gui.in_focus; | |
| 5416 | |
| 5417 do | |
| 5418 { | |
| 5419 /* Stop or start blinking when focus changes */ | |
| 5420 if (gui.in_focus != focus) | |
| 5421 { | |
| 5422 if (gui.in_focus) | |
| 5423 gui_mch_start_blink(); | |
| 5424 else | |
| 5425 gui_mch_stop_blink(); | |
| 5426 focus = gui.in_focus; | |
| 5427 } | |
| 5428 | |
| 1624 | 5429 #if defined(FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG) |
| 2714 | 5430 /* Process any queued netbeans messages. */ |
| 1624 | 5431 netbeans_parse_messages(); |
| 5432 #endif | |
| 5433 | |
| 7 | 5434 /* |
| 5435 * Loop in GTK+ processing until a timeout or input occurs. | |
| 22 | 5436 * Skip this if input is available anyway (can happen in rare |
| 5437 * situations, sort of race condition). | |
| 7 | 5438 */ |
| 22 | 5439 if (!input_available()) |
|
2301
6f63294a1781
Avoid use of the GTK mail_loop() so that the GtkFileChooser can be used.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2278
diff
changeset
|
5440 g_main_context_iteration(NULL, TRUE); |
| 7 | 5441 |
| 5442 /* Got char, return immediately */ | |
| 5443 if (input_available()) | |
| 5444 { | |
| 5445 if (timer != 0 && !timed_out) | |
| 5446 gtk_timeout_remove(timer); | |
| 5447 return OK; | |
| 5448 } | |
| 5449 } while (wtime < 0 || !timed_out); | |
| 5450 | |
| 5451 /* | |
| 5452 * Flush all eventually pending (drawing) events. | |
| 5453 */ | |
| 5454 gui_mch_update(); | |
| 5455 | |
| 5456 return FAIL; | |
| 5457 } | |
| 5458 | |
| 5459 | |
| 5460 /**************************************************************************** | |
| 5461 * Output drawing routines. | |
| 5462 ****************************************************************************/ | |
| 5463 | |
| 5464 | |
| 5465 /* Flush any output to the screen */ | |
| 5466 void | |
| 5467 gui_mch_flush(void) | |
| 5468 { | |
| 5469 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD | |
| 5470 if (gui.mainwin != NULL && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(gui.mainwin)) | |
| 5471 gdk_display_sync(gtk_widget_get_display(gui.mainwin)); | |
| 5472 #else | |
| 5473 gdk_flush(); /* historical misnomer: calls XSync(), not XFlush() */ | |
| 5474 #endif | |
| 5475 /* This happens to actually do what gui_mch_flush() is supposed to do, | |
| 5476 * according to the comment above. */ | |
| 5477 if (gui.drawarea != NULL && gui.drawarea->window != NULL) | |
| 5478 gdk_window_process_updates(gui.drawarea->window, FALSE); | |
| 5479 } | |
| 5480 | |
| 5481 /* | |
| 5482 * Clear a rectangular region of the screen from text pos (row1, col1) to | |
| 5483 * (row2, col2) inclusive. | |
| 5484 */ | |
| 5485 void | |
| 5486 gui_mch_clear_block(int row1, int col1, int row2, int col2) | |
| 5487 { | |
| 5488 GdkColor color; | |
| 5489 | |
| 5490 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL) | |
| 5491 return; | |
| 5492 | |
| 5493 color.pixel = gui.back_pixel; | |
| 5494 | |
| 5495 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, &color); | |
| 5496 | |
| 5497 /* Clear one extra pixel at the far right, for when bold characters have | |
| 5498 * spilled over to the window border. */ | |
| 5499 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc, TRUE, | |
| 5500 FILL_X(col1), FILL_Y(row1), | |
| 5501 (col2 - col1 + 1) * gui.char_width | |
| 5502 + (col2 == Columns - 1), | |
| 5503 (row2 - row1 + 1) * gui.char_height); | |
| 5504 } | |
| 5505 | |
| 5506 void | |
| 5507 gui_mch_clear_all(void) | |
| 5508 { | |
| 5509 if (gui.drawarea->window != NULL) | |
| 5510 gdk_window_clear(gui.drawarea->window); | |
| 5511 } | |
| 5512 | |
| 5513 /* | |
| 5514 * Redraw any text revealed by scrolling up/down. | |
| 5515 */ | |
| 5516 static void | |
| 5517 check_copy_area(void) | |
| 5518 { | |
| 5519 GdkEvent *event; | |
| 5520 int expose_count; | |
| 5521 | |
| 5522 if (gui.visibility != GDK_VISIBILITY_PARTIAL) | |
| 5523 return; | |
| 5524 | |
| 5525 /* Avoid redrawing the cursor while scrolling or it'll end up where | |
| 5526 * we don't want it to be. I'm not sure if it's correct to call | |
| 5527 * gui_dont_update_cursor() at this point but it works as a quick | |
| 5528 * fix for now. */ | |
| 5529 gui_dont_update_cursor(); | |
| 5530 | |
| 5531 do | |
| 5532 { | |
| 5533 /* Wait to check whether the scroll worked or not. */ | |
| 5534 event = gdk_event_get_graphics_expose(gui.drawarea->window); | |
| 5535 | |
| 5536 if (event == NULL) | |
| 5537 break; /* received NoExpose event */ | |
| 5538 | |
| 5539 gui_redraw(event->expose.area.x, event->expose.area.y, | |
| 5540 event->expose.area.width, event->expose.area.height); | |
| 5541 | |
| 5542 expose_count = event->expose.count; | |
| 5543 gdk_event_free(event); | |
| 5544 } | |
| 5545 while (expose_count > 0); /* more events follow */ | |
| 5546 | |
| 5547 gui_can_update_cursor(); | |
| 5548 } | |
| 5549 | |
| 5550 /* | |
| 5551 * Delete the given number of lines from the given row, scrolling up any | |
| 5552 * text further down within the scroll region. | |
| 5553 */ | |
| 5554 void | |
| 5555 gui_mch_delete_lines(int row, int num_lines) | |
| 5556 { | |
| 5557 if (gui.visibility == GDK_VISIBILITY_FULLY_OBSCURED) | |
| 5558 return; /* Can't see the window */ | |
| 5559 | |
| 5560 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor); | |
| 5561 gdk_gc_set_background(gui.text_gc, gui.bgcolor); | |
| 5562 | |
| 5563 /* copy one extra pixel, for when bold has spilled over */ | |
| 5564 gdk_window_copy_area(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc, | |
| 5565 FILL_X(gui.scroll_region_left), FILL_Y(row), | |
| 5566 gui.drawarea->window, | |
| 5567 FILL_X(gui.scroll_region_left), | |
| 5568 FILL_Y(row + num_lines), | |
| 5569 gui.char_width * (gui.scroll_region_right | |
| 5570 - gui.scroll_region_left + 1) + 1, | |
| 5571 gui.char_height * (gui.scroll_region_bot - row - num_lines + 1)); | |
| 5572 | |
| 5573 gui_clear_block(gui.scroll_region_bot - num_lines + 1, | |
| 5574 gui.scroll_region_left, | |
| 5575 gui.scroll_region_bot, gui.scroll_region_right); | |
| 5576 check_copy_area(); | |
| 5577 } | |
| 5578 | |
| 5579 /* | |
| 5580 * Insert the given number of lines before the given row, scrolling down any | |
| 5581 * following text within the scroll region. | |
| 5582 */ | |
| 5583 void | |
| 5584 gui_mch_insert_lines(int row, int num_lines) | |
| 5585 { | |
| 5586 if (gui.visibility == GDK_VISIBILITY_FULLY_OBSCURED) | |
| 5587 return; /* Can't see the window */ | |
| 5588 | |
| 5589 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor); | |
| 5590 gdk_gc_set_background(gui.text_gc, gui.bgcolor); | |
| 5591 | |
| 5592 /* copy one extra pixel, for when bold has spilled over */ | |
| 5593 gdk_window_copy_area(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc, | |
| 5594 FILL_X(gui.scroll_region_left), FILL_Y(row + num_lines), | |
| 5595 gui.drawarea->window, | |
| 5596 FILL_X(gui.scroll_region_left), FILL_Y(row), | |
| 5597 gui.char_width * (gui.scroll_region_right | |
| 5598 - gui.scroll_region_left + 1) + 1, | |
| 5599 gui.char_height * (gui.scroll_region_bot - row - num_lines + 1)); | |
| 5600 | |
| 5601 gui_clear_block(row, gui.scroll_region_left, | |
| 5602 row + num_lines - 1, gui.scroll_region_right); | |
| 5603 check_copy_area(); | |
| 5604 } | |
| 5605 | |
| 5606 /* | |
| 5607 * X Selection stuff, for cutting and pasting text to other windows. | |
| 5608 */ | |
| 5609 void | |
| 5610 clip_mch_request_selection(VimClipboard *cbd) | |
| 5611 { | |
| 5612 GdkAtom target; | |
| 5613 unsigned i; | |
| 1494 | 5614 time_t start; |
| 7 | 5615 |
| 5616 for (i = 0; i < N_SELECTION_TARGETS; ++i) | |
| 5617 { | |
| 1904 | 5618 if (!clip_html && selection_targets[i].info == TARGET_HTML) |
| 5619 continue; | |
| 7 | 5620 received_selection = RS_NONE; |
| 5621 target = gdk_atom_intern(selection_targets[i].target, FALSE); | |
| 5622 | |
| 5623 gtk_selection_convert(gui.drawarea, | |
| 5624 cbd->gtk_sel_atom, target, | |
| 5625 (guint32)GDK_CURRENT_TIME); | |
| 5626 | |
| 1494 | 5627 /* Hack: Wait up to three seconds for the selection. A hang was |
| 5628 * noticed here when using the netrw plugin combined with ":gui" | |
| 5629 * during the FocusGained event. */ | |
| 5630 start = time(NULL); | |
| 5631 while (received_selection == RS_NONE && time(NULL) < start + 3) | |
|
2301
6f63294a1781
Avoid use of the GTK mail_loop() so that the GtkFileChooser can be used.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2278
diff
changeset
|
5632 g_main_context_iteration(NULL, TRUE); /* wait for selection_received_cb */ |
| 7 | 5633 |
| 5634 if (received_selection != RS_FAIL) | |
| 5635 return; | |
| 5636 } | |
| 5637 | |
| 5638 /* Final fallback position - use the X CUT_BUFFER0 store */ | |
| 1924 | 5639 yank_cut_buffer0(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window), cbd); |
| 7 | 5640 } |
| 5641 | |
| 5642 /* | |
| 5643 * Disown the selection. | |
| 5644 */ | |
| 5645 void | |
| 1884 | 5646 clip_mch_lose_selection(VimClipboard *cbd UNUSED) |
| 7 | 5647 { |
| 5648 /* WEIRD: when using NULL to actually disown the selection, we lose the | |
| 5649 * selection the first time we own it. */ | |
| 5650 /* | |
| 5651 gtk_selection_owner_set(NULL, cbd->gtk_sel_atom, (guint32)GDK_CURRENT_TIME); | |
| 5652 gui_mch_update(); | |
| 5653 */ | |
| 5654 } | |
| 5655 | |
| 5656 /* | |
| 5657 * Own the selection and return OK if it worked. | |
| 5658 */ | |
| 5659 int | |
| 5660 clip_mch_own_selection(VimClipboard *cbd) | |
| 5661 { | |
| 5662 int success; | |
| 5663 | |
| 5664 success = gtk_selection_owner_set(gui.drawarea, cbd->gtk_sel_atom, | |
| 2923 | 5665 gui.event_time); |
| 7 | 5666 gui_mch_update(); |
| 5667 return (success) ? OK : FAIL; | |
| 5668 } | |
| 5669 | |
| 5670 /* | |
| 5671 * Send the current selection to the clipboard. Do nothing for X because we | |
| 5672 * will fill in the selection only when requested by another app. | |
| 5673 */ | |
| 5674 void | |
| 1884 | 5675 clip_mch_set_selection(VimClipboard *cbd UNUSED) |
| 7 | 5676 { |
| 5677 } | |
| 5678 | |
| 5679 | |
| 5680 #if defined(FEAT_MENU) || defined(PROTO) | |
| 5681 /* | |
| 5682 * Make a menu item appear either active or not active (grey or not grey). | |
| 5683 */ | |
| 5684 void | |
| 5685 gui_mch_menu_grey(vimmenu_T *menu, int grey) | |
| 5686 { | |
| 5687 if (menu->id == NULL) | |
| 5688 return; | |
| 5689 | |
| 5690 if (menu_is_separator(menu->name)) | |
| 5691 grey = TRUE; | |
| 5692 | |
| 5693 gui_mch_menu_hidden(menu, FALSE); | |
| 5694 /* Be clever about bitfields versus true booleans here! */ | |
| 5695 if (!GTK_WIDGET_SENSITIVE(menu->id) == !grey) | |
| 5696 { | |
| 5697 gtk_widget_set_sensitive(menu->id, !grey); | |
| 5698 gui_mch_update(); | |
| 5699 } | |
| 5700 } | |
| 5701 | |
| 5702 /* | |
| 5703 * Make menu item hidden or not hidden. | |
| 5704 */ | |
| 5705 void | |
| 5706 gui_mch_menu_hidden(vimmenu_T *menu, int hidden) | |
| 5707 { | |
| 5708 if (menu->id == 0) | |
| 5709 return; | |
| 5710 | |
| 5711 if (hidden) | |
| 5712 { | |
| 5713 if (GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(menu->id)) | |
| 5714 { | |
| 5715 gtk_widget_hide(menu->id); | |
| 5716 gui_mch_update(); | |
| 5717 } | |
| 5718 } | |
| 5719 else | |
| 5720 { | |
| 5721 if (!GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(menu->id)) | |
| 5722 { | |
| 5723 gtk_widget_show(menu->id); | |
| 5724 gui_mch_update(); | |
| 5725 } | |
| 5726 } | |
| 5727 } | |
| 5728 | |
| 5729 /* | |
| 5730 * This is called after setting all the menus to grey/hidden or not. | |
| 5731 */ | |
| 5732 void | |
| 5733 gui_mch_draw_menubar(void) | |
| 5734 { | |
| 5735 /* just make sure that the visual changes get effect immediately */ | |
| 5736 gui_mch_update(); | |
| 5737 } | |
| 5738 #endif /* FEAT_MENU */ | |
| 5739 | |
| 5740 /* | |
| 5741 * Scrollbar stuff. | |
| 5742 */ | |
| 5743 void | |
| 5744 gui_mch_enable_scrollbar(scrollbar_T *sb, int flag) | |
| 5745 { | |
| 5746 if (sb->id == NULL) | |
| 5747 return; | |
| 5748 | |
| 5749 if (flag) | |
| 5750 gtk_widget_show(sb->id); | |
| 5751 else | |
| 5752 gtk_widget_hide(sb->id); | |
| 5753 | |
| 791 | 5754 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0); |
| 7 | 5755 } |
| 5756 | |
| 5757 | |
| 5758 /* | |
| 5759 * Return the RGB value of a pixel as long. | |
| 5760 */ | |
| 5761 long_u | |
| 5762 gui_mch_get_rgb(guicolor_T pixel) | |
| 5763 { | |
| 5764 GdkColor color; | |
| 5765 gdk_colormap_query_color(gtk_widget_get_colormap(gui.drawarea), | |
| 5766 (unsigned long)pixel, &color); | |
| 5767 | |
| 5768 return (((unsigned)color.red & 0xff00) << 8) | |
| 5769 | ((unsigned)color.green & 0xff00) | |
| 5770 | (((unsigned)color.blue & 0xff00) >> 8); | |
| 5771 } | |
| 5772 | |
| 5773 /* | |
| 88 | 5774 * Get current mouse coordinates in text window. |
| 7 | 5775 */ |
| 88 | 5776 void |
| 5777 gui_mch_getmouse(int *x, int *y) | |
| 7 | 5778 { |
| 88 | 5779 gdk_window_get_pointer(gui.drawarea->window, x, y, NULL); |
| 7 | 5780 } |
| 5781 | |
| 5782 void | |
| 5783 gui_mch_setmouse(int x, int y) | |
| 5784 { | |
| 5785 /* Sorry for the Xlib call, but we can't avoid it, since there is no | |
| 5786 * internal GDK mechanism present to accomplish this. (and for good | |
| 5787 * reason...) */ | |
| 5788 XWarpPointer(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.drawarea->window), | |
| 5789 (Window)0, GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.drawarea->window), | |
| 5790 0, 0, 0U, 0U, x, y); | |
| 5791 } | |
| 5792 | |
| 5793 | |
| 5794 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSESHAPE | |
| 5795 /* The last set mouse pointer shape is remembered, to be used when it goes | |
| 5796 * from hidden to not hidden. */ | |
| 5797 static int last_shape = 0; | |
| 5798 #endif | |
| 5799 | |
| 5800 /* | |
| 5801 * Use the blank mouse pointer or not. | |
| 5802 * | |
| 5803 * hide: TRUE = use blank ptr, FALSE = use parent ptr | |
| 5804 */ | |
| 5805 void | |
| 5806 gui_mch_mousehide(int hide) | |
| 5807 { | |
| 5808 if (gui.pointer_hidden != hide) | |
| 5809 { | |
| 5810 gui.pointer_hidden = hide; | |
| 5811 if (gui.drawarea->window && gui.blank_pointer != NULL) | |
| 5812 { | |
| 5813 if (hide) | |
| 5814 gdk_window_set_cursor(gui.drawarea->window, gui.blank_pointer); | |
| 5815 else | |
| 5816 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSESHAPE | |
| 5817 mch_set_mouse_shape(last_shape); | |
| 5818 #else | |
| 5819 gdk_window_set_cursor(gui.drawarea->window, NULL); | |
| 5820 #endif | |
| 5821 } | |
| 5822 } | |
| 5823 } | |
| 5824 | |
| 5825 #if defined(FEAT_MOUSESHAPE) || defined(PROTO) | |
| 5826 | |
| 5827 /* Table for shape IDs. Keep in sync with the mshape_names[] table in | |
| 5828 * misc2.c! */ | |
| 5829 static const int mshape_ids[] = | |
| 5830 { | |
| 5831 GDK_LEFT_PTR, /* arrow */ | |
| 5832 GDK_CURSOR_IS_PIXMAP, /* blank */ | |
| 5833 GDK_XTERM, /* beam */ | |
| 5834 GDK_SB_V_DOUBLE_ARROW, /* updown */ | |
| 5835 GDK_SIZING, /* udsizing */ | |
| 5836 GDK_SB_H_DOUBLE_ARROW, /* leftright */ | |
| 5837 GDK_SIZING, /* lrsizing */ | |
| 5838 GDK_WATCH, /* busy */ | |
| 5839 GDK_X_CURSOR, /* no */ | |
| 5840 GDK_CROSSHAIR, /* crosshair */ | |
| 5841 GDK_HAND1, /* hand1 */ | |
| 5842 GDK_HAND2, /* hand2 */ | |
| 5843 GDK_PENCIL, /* pencil */ | |
| 5844 GDK_QUESTION_ARROW, /* question */ | |
| 5845 GDK_RIGHT_PTR, /* right-arrow */ | |
| 5846 GDK_CENTER_PTR, /* up-arrow */ | |
| 5847 GDK_LEFT_PTR /* last one */ | |
| 5848 }; | |
| 5849 | |
| 5850 void | |
| 5851 mch_set_mouse_shape(int shape) | |
| 5852 { | |
| 5853 int id; | |
| 5854 GdkCursor *c; | |
| 5855 | |
| 5856 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL) | |
| 5857 return; | |
| 5858 | |
| 5859 if (shape == MSHAPE_HIDE || gui.pointer_hidden) | |
| 5860 gdk_window_set_cursor(gui.drawarea->window, gui.blank_pointer); | |
| 5861 else | |
| 5862 { | |
| 5863 if (shape >= MSHAPE_NUMBERED) | |
| 5864 { | |
| 5865 id = shape - MSHAPE_NUMBERED; | |
| 5866 if (id >= GDK_LAST_CURSOR) | |
| 5867 id = GDK_LEFT_PTR; | |
| 5868 else | |
| 5869 id &= ~1; /* they are always even (why?) */ | |
| 5870 } | |
| 1884 | 5871 else if (shape < (int)(sizeof(mshape_ids) / sizeof(int))) |
| 7 | 5872 id = mshape_ids[shape]; |
| 842 | 5873 else |
| 5874 return; | |
| 7 | 5875 # ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD |
| 5876 c = gdk_cursor_new_for_display( | |
| 136 | 5877 gtk_widget_get_display(gui.drawarea), (GdkCursorType)id); |
| 7 | 5878 # else |
| 136 | 5879 c = gdk_cursor_new((GdkCursorType)id); |
| 7 | 5880 # endif |
| 5881 gdk_window_set_cursor(gui.drawarea->window, c); | |
| 5882 gdk_cursor_destroy(c); /* Unref, actually. Bloody GTK+ 1. */ | |
| 5883 } | |
| 5884 if (shape != MSHAPE_HIDE) | |
| 5885 last_shape = shape; | |
| 5886 } | |
| 5887 #endif /* FEAT_MOUSESHAPE */ | |
| 5888 | |
| 5889 | |
| 5890 #if defined(FEAT_SIGN_ICONS) || defined(PROTO) | |
| 5891 /* | |
| 5892 * Signs are currently always 2 chars wide. With GTK+ 2, the image will be | |
| 5893 * scaled down if the current font is not big enough, or scaled up if the image | |
| 5894 * size is less than 3/4 of the maximum sign size. With GTK+ 1, the pixmap | |
| 5895 * will be cut off if the current font is not big enough, or centered if it's | |
| 5896 * too small. | |
| 5897 */ | |
| 5898 # define SIGN_WIDTH (2 * gui.char_width) | |
| 5899 # define SIGN_HEIGHT (gui.char_height) | |
| 5900 # define SIGN_ASPECT ((double)SIGN_HEIGHT / (double)SIGN_WIDTH) | |
| 5901 | |
| 5902 void | |
| 5903 gui_mch_drawsign(int row, int col, int typenr) | |
| 5904 { | |
| 5905 GdkPixbuf *sign; | |
| 5906 | |
| 5907 sign = (GdkPixbuf *)sign_get_image(typenr); | |
| 5908 | |
| 5909 if (sign != NULL && gui.drawarea != NULL && gui.drawarea->window != NULL) | |
| 5910 { | |
| 5911 int width; | |
| 5912 int height; | |
| 5913 int xoffset; | |
| 5914 int yoffset; | |
| 5915 int need_scale; | |
| 5916 | |
| 5917 width = gdk_pixbuf_get_width(sign); | |
| 5918 height = gdk_pixbuf_get_height(sign); | |
| 5919 /* | |
| 5920 * Decide whether we need to scale. Allow one pixel of border | |
| 5921 * width to be cut off, in order to avoid excessive scaling for | |
| 5922 * tiny differences in font size. | |
| 5923 */ | |
| 5924 need_scale = (width > SIGN_WIDTH + 2 | |
| 5925 || height > SIGN_HEIGHT + 2 | |
| 5926 || (width < 3 * SIGN_WIDTH / 4 | |
| 5927 && height < 3 * SIGN_HEIGHT / 4)); | |
| 5928 if (need_scale) | |
| 5929 { | |
| 5930 double aspect; | |
| 5931 | |
| 5932 /* Keep the original aspect ratio */ | |
| 5933 aspect = (double)height / (double)width; | |
| 5934 width = (double)SIGN_WIDTH * SIGN_ASPECT / aspect; | |
| 5935 width = MIN(width, SIGN_WIDTH); | |
| 5936 height = (double)width * aspect; | |
| 5937 | |
| 5938 /* This doesn't seem to be worth caching, and doing so | |
| 5939 * would complicate the code quite a bit. */ | |
| 5940 sign = gdk_pixbuf_scale_simple(sign, width, height, | |
| 5941 GDK_INTERP_BILINEAR); | |
| 5942 if (sign == NULL) | |
| 5943 return; /* out of memory */ | |
| 5944 } | |
| 5945 | |
| 5946 /* The origin is the upper-left corner of the pixmap. Therefore | |
| 5947 * these offset may become negative if the pixmap is smaller than | |
| 5948 * the 2x1 cells reserved for the sign icon. */ | |
| 5949 xoffset = (width - SIGN_WIDTH) / 2; | |
| 5950 yoffset = (height - SIGN_HEIGHT) / 2; | |
| 5951 | |
| 5952 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.bgcolor); | |
| 5953 | |
| 5954 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, | |
| 5955 gui.text_gc, | |
| 5956 TRUE, | |
| 5957 FILL_X(col), | |
| 5958 FILL_Y(row), | |
| 5959 SIGN_WIDTH, | |
| 5960 SIGN_HEIGHT); | |
| 5961 | |
| 5962 gdk_pixbuf_render_to_drawable_alpha(sign, | |
| 5963 gui.drawarea->window, | |
| 5964 MAX(0, xoffset), | |
| 5965 MAX(0, yoffset), | |
| 5966 FILL_X(col) - MIN(0, xoffset), | |
| 5967 FILL_Y(row) - MIN(0, yoffset), | |
| 5968 MIN(width, SIGN_WIDTH), | |
| 5969 MIN(height, SIGN_HEIGHT), | |
| 5970 GDK_PIXBUF_ALPHA_BILEVEL, | |
| 5971 127, | |
| 5972 GDK_RGB_DITHER_NORMAL, | |
| 5973 0, 0); | |
| 5974 if (need_scale) | |
| 5975 g_object_unref(sign); | |
| 5976 } | |
| 5977 } | |
| 5978 | |
| 5979 void * | |
| 5980 gui_mch_register_sign(char_u *signfile) | |
| 5981 { | |
| 5982 if (signfile[0] != NUL && signfile[0] != '-' && gui.in_use) | |
| 5983 { | |
| 5984 GdkPixbuf *sign; | |
| 5985 GError *error = NULL; | |
| 5986 char_u *message; | |
| 5987 | |
| 5988 sign = gdk_pixbuf_new_from_file((const char *)signfile, &error); | |
| 5989 | |
| 5990 if (error == NULL) | |
| 5991 return sign; | |
| 5992 | |
| 5993 message = (char_u *)error->message; | |
| 5994 | |
| 5995 if (message != NULL && input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
| 5996 message = string_convert(&input_conv, message, NULL); | |
| 5997 | |
| 5998 if (message != NULL) | |
| 5999 { | |
| 6000 /* The error message is already translated and will be more | |
| 6001 * descriptive than anything we could possibly do ourselves. */ | |
| 6002 EMSG2("E255: %s", message); | |
| 6003 | |
| 6004 if (input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
| 6005 vim_free(message); | |
| 6006 } | |
| 6007 g_error_free(error); | |
| 6008 } | |
| 6009 | |
| 6010 return NULL; | |
| 6011 } | |
| 6012 | |
| 6013 void | |
| 6014 gui_mch_destroy_sign(void *sign) | |
| 6015 { | |
| 6016 if (sign != NULL) | |
| 6017 g_object_unref(sign); | |
| 6018 } | |
| 6019 | |
| 6020 #endif /* FEAT_SIGN_ICONS */ |